TI-Nspire™ CX CAS

Reference Guide

Learn more about TI Technology through the online help at education.ti.com/eguide.

Important Information
Except as otherwise expressly stated in the License that accompanies a program, Texas
Instruments makes no warranty, either express or implied, including but not limited to
any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose,
regarding any programs or book materials and makes such materials available solely on
an "as-is" basis. In no event shall Texas Instruments be liable to anyone for special,
collateral, incidental, or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of the
purchase or use of these materials, and the sole and exclusive liability of Texas
Instruments, regardless of the form of action, shall not exceed the amount set forth in
the license for the program. Moreover, Texas Instruments shall not be liable for any
claim of any kind whatsoever against the use of these materials by any other party.
© 2023 Texas Instruments Incorporated
Actual products may vary slightly from provided images.

ii
Contents

Expression Templates 1
Alphabetical Listing 8
A 8
B 17
C 21
D 45
E 58
F 68
G 78
I 88
L 96
M 112
N 120
O 129
P 132
Q 141
R 143
S 158
T 183
U 199
V 200
W 201
X 203
Z 204

Symbols 213
TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 240
Graphics Programming 240
Graphics Screen 240
Default View and Settings 241
Graphics Screen Errors Messages 242
Invalid Commands While in Graphics Mode 242
C 243
D 244
F 247
G 249
P 250
S 252
U 254

iii
Empty (Void) Elements 255
Shortcuts for Entering Maths Expressions 257
EOS™ (Equation Operating System) Hierarchy 259
TI-Nspire CX II - TI-Basic Programming Features 261
Auto-indentation in Programming Editor 261
Improved Error Messages for TI-Basic 261

Constants and Values 264

Error Codes and Messages 265
Warning Codes and Messages 273
General Information 275
Index 276

iv
Expression Templates
Expression templates give you an easy way to enter maths expressions in standard
mathematical notation. When you insert a template, it appears on the entry line with
small blocks at positions where you can enter elements. A cursor shows which element
you can enter.

Use the arrow keys or press e to move the cursor to each element’s position, and
type a value or expression for the element. Press · or /· to evaluate the
expression.

Fraction template /p keys

Example:

Note: See also / (divide), page 215.

Exponent template l key

Example:

Note: Type the first value, press l, and

then type the exponent. To return the
cursor to the baseline, press right arrow
(¢).
Note: See also ^ (power), page 216.

Square root template /q keys

Example:
Note: See also √() (square root), page
226.

Expression Templates 1
 Nth root template /l keys
Example:

Note: See also root(), page 155.

e exponent template u keys

Example:

Natural exponential e raised to a power

Note: See also e^(), page 58.

Log template /s key

Example:

Calculates log to a specified base. For a

default of base 10, omit the base.
Note: See also log(), page 107.

Piecewise template (2-piece) Catalogue >

Example:

Lets you create expressions and

conditions for a two-piece piecewise
function. To add a piece, click in the
template and repeat the template.
Note: See also piecewise(), page 133.

2 Expression Templates
Piecewise template (N-piece) Catalogue >
Lets you create expressions and conditions for an Example:
N-piece piecewise function. Prompts for N.
See the example for Piecewise
template (2-piece).

Note: See also piecewise(), page 133.

System of 2 equations template Catalogue >

Example:

Creates a system of two equations. To

add a row to an existing system, click in
the template and repeat the template.
Note: See also system(), page 183.

System of N equations template Catalogue >

Lets you create a system of Nequations. Prompts for Example:
N.
See the example for System of
equations template (2-
equation).

Note: See also system(), page 183.

Absolute value template Catalogue >

Example:
Note: See also abs(), page 8.

Expression Templates 3
 Absolute value template Catalogue >

dd°mm’ss.ss’’ template Catalogue >

Example:

Lets you enter angles in dd°mm’ss.ss’’

format, where dd is the number of
decimal degrees, mm is the number of
minutes, and ss.ss is the number of
seconds.

Matrix template (2 x 2) Catalogue >

Example:

Creates a 2 x 2 matrix.

Matrix template (1 x 2) Catalogue >

Example:
.

Matrix template (2 x 1) Catalogue >

Example:

Matrix template (m x n) Catalogue >

The template appears after you are Example:
prompted to specify the number of rows
and columns.

4 Expression Templates
Matrix template (m x n) Catalogue >

Note: If you create a matrix with a large

number of rows and columns, it may
take a few moments to appear.

Sum template (Σ) Catalogue >

Example:

Note: See also Σ() (sumSeq), page 228.

Product template (Π) Catalogue >

Example:

Note: See also Π() (prodSeq), page 227.

First derivative template Catalogue >

Example:

The first derivative template can also be

used to calculate first derivative at a
point.
Note: See also d() (derivative), page 224.

Expression Templates 5
 Second derivative template Catalogue >
Example:

The second derivative template can also

be used to calculate second derivative at
a point.
Note: See also d() (derivative), page 224.

Nth derivative template Catalogue >

Example:

The nth derivative template can be used

to calculate the nth derivative.
Note: See also d() (derivative), page 224.

Definite integral template Catalogue >

Example:

Note: See also∫() integral(), page 225.

Indefinite integral template Catalogue >

Example:

Note: See also ∫() integral(), page 225.

Limit template Catalogue >

Example:

6 Expression Templates
Limit template Catalogue >
Use − or (−) for left hand limit. Use + for
right hand limit.
Note: See also limit(), page 98.

Expression Templates 7
Alphabetical Listing
Items whose names are not alphabetic (such as +, ! and >) are listed at the end of this
section, starting page 213. Unless otherwise specified, all examples in this section were
performed in the default reset mode, and all variables are assumed to be undefined.

abs() Catalogue >

abs(Expr1)⇒expression
abs(List1)⇒list
abs(Matrix1)⇒matrix
Returns the absolute value of the
argument.
Note: See also Absolute value template,
page 3.
If the argument is a complex number,
returns the number’s modulus.
Note: All undefined variables are treated
as real variables.

amortTbl() Catalogue >

amortTbl(NPmt,N,I,PV, [Pmt], [FV],
[PpY], [CpY], [PmtAt],
[roundValue])⇒matrix
Amortisation function that returns a
matrix as an amortisation table for a set
of TVM arguments.
NPmt is the number of payments to be
included in the table. The table starts
with the first payment.
N, I, PV, Pmt, FV, PpY, CpY and PmtAt
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 197.
• If you omit Pmt, it defaults to
Pmt=tvmPmt
(N,I,PV,FV,PpY,CpY,PmtAt).
• If you omit FV, it defaults to FV=0.
• The defaults for PpY, CpY and PmtAt

8 Alphabetical Listing
amortTbl() Catalogue >
are the same as for the TVM functions.
roundValue specifies the number of
decimal places for rounding. Default=2.
The columns in the result matrix are in
this order: Payment number, amount
paid to interest, amount paid to
principal, and balance.
The balance displayed in row n is the
balance after payment n.
You can use the output matrix as input
for the other amortisation functions ΣInt
() and ΣPrn(), page 228, and bal(), page
17.

and Catalogue >

BooleanExpr1 and
BooleanExpr2⇒Boolean expression
BooleanList1 and
BooleanList2⇒Boolean list
BooleanMatrix1 and
BooleanMatrix2⇒Boolean matrix
Returns true or false or a simplified form
of the original entry.
Integer1andInteger2⇒integer In Hex base mode:

Compares two real integers bit-by-bit

using an and operation. Internally, both
integers are converted to signed, 64-bit Important: Zero, not the letter O.
binary numbers. When corresponding
bits are compared, the result is 1 if both
bits are 1; otherwise, the result is 0. The In Bin base mode:
returned value represents the bit results
and is displayed according to the Base
mode.
You can enter the integers in any
number base. For a binary or In Dec base mode:
hexadecimal entry, you must use the 0b
or 0h prefix, respectively. Without a
prefix, integers are treated as decimal
(base 10).

Alphabetical Listing 9
 and Catalogue >
Note: A binary entry can have up to 64 digits
(not counting the 0b prefix). A hexadecimal
entry can have up to 16 digits.

angle() Catalogue >

angle(Expr1)⇒expression In Degree angle mode:

Returns the angle of the argument,

interpreting the argument as a complex
number.
Note: All undefined variables are treated In Gradian angle mode:
as real variables.

In Radian angle mode:

angle(List1)⇒list
angle(Matrix1)⇒matrix
Returns a list or matrix of angles of the
elements in List1 or Matrix1,
interpreting each element as a complex
number that represents a two-
dimensional rectangular coordinate
point.

ANOVA Catalogue >

ANOVA List1,List2[,List3,...,List20][,Flag]

10 Alphabetical Listing
 ANOVA Catalogue >
Performs a one-way analysis of variance for
comparing the means of two to 20 populations. A
summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable (page 178).
Flag=0 for Data, Flag=1 for Stats

Output variable Description

stat.F Value of the F statistic

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom of the groups

stat.SS Sum of squares of the groups

stat.MS Mean squares for the groups

stat.dfError Degrees of freedom of the errors

stat.SSError Sum of squares of the errors

stat.MSError Mean square for the errors

stat.sp Pooled standard deviation

stat.xbarlist Mean of the input of the lists

stat.CLowerList 95% confidence intervals for the mean of each input list

stat.CUpperList 95% confidence intervals for the mean of each input list

ANOVA2way Catalogue >

ANOVA2way List1,List2[,List3,…,List10][,levRow]
Computes a two-way analysis of variance for
comparing the means of two to 10 populations. A
summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable (page 178).
LevRow=0 for Block
LevRow=2,3,...,Len-1, for Two Factor, where
Len=length(List1)=length(List2) = … = length(List10)
and Len / LevRow ∈ {2,3,…}
Outputs: Block Design

Output variable Description

stat.F F statistic of the column factor

Alphabetical Listing 11
Output variable Description
stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom of the column factor

stat.SS Sum of squares of the column factor

stat.MS Mean squares for column factor

stat.FBlock F statistic for factor

stat.PValBlock Least probability at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.dfBlock Degrees of freedom for factor

stat.SSBlock Sum of squares for factor

stat.MSBlock Mean squares for factor

stat.dfError Degrees of freedom of the errors

stat.SSError Sum of squares of the errors

stat.MSError Mean squares for the errors

stat.s Standard deviation of the error

COLUMN FACTOR Outputs

Output variable Description

stat.Fcol F statistic of the column factor

stat.PValCol Probability value of the column factor

stat.dfCol Degrees of freedom of the column factor

stat.SSCol Sum of squares of the column factor

stat.MSCol Mean squares for column factor

ROW FACTOR Outputs

Output variable Description

stat.FRow F statistic of the row factor

stat.PValRow Probability value of the row factor

stat.dfRow Degrees of freedom of the row factor

stat.SSRow Sum of squares of the row factor

stat.MSRow Mean squares for row factor

INTERACTION Outputs

12 Alphabetical Listing
Output variable Description
stat.FInteract F statistic of the interaction

stat.PValInteract Probability value of the interaction

stat.dfInteract Degrees of freedom of the interaction

stat.SSInteract Sum of squares of the interaction

stat.MSInteract Mean squares for interaction

ERROR Outputs

Output variable Description

stat.dfError Degrees of freedom of the errors

stat.SSError Sum of squares of the errors

stat.MSError Mean squares for the errors

s Standard deviation of the error

Ans /v keys
Ans⇒value
Returns the result of the most recently
evaluated expression.

approx() Catalogue >

approx(Expr1)⇒expression
Returns the evaluation of the argument
as an expression containing decimal
values, when possible, regardless of the
current Auto or Approximate mode.
This is equivalent to entering the
argument and pressing /·.

approx(List1)⇒list
approx(Matrix1)⇒matrix
Returns a list or matrix where each
element has been evaluated to a decimal
value, when possible.

Alphabetical Listing 13
 4approxFraction() Catalogue >
Expr 4approxFraction
([Tol])⇒expression
List 4approxFraction([Tol])⇒list
Matrix 4approxFraction([Tol])⇒matrix
Returns the input as a fraction, using a
tolerance of Tol. If Tol is omitted, a
tolerance of 5.E-14 is used.
Note: You can insert this function from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>approxFraction(...).

approxRational() Catalogue >

approxRational(Expr[,
Tol])⇒expression
approxRational(List[, Tol])⇒list
approxRational(Matrix[, Tol])⇒matrix
Returns the argument as a fraction using
a tolerance of Tol. If Tol is omitted, a
tolerance of 5.E-14 is used.

arccos() See cos/(), page 31.

arccosh() See cosh/(), page 33.

arccot() See cot/(), page 34.

arccoth() See coth/(), page 34.

14 Alphabetical Listing
arccsc() See csc/(), page 37.

arccsch() See csch/(), page 38.

arcLen() Catalogue >

arcLen(Expr1,Var,Start,End)
⇒expression
Returns the arc length of Expr1 from
Start to End with respect to variable
Var.
Arc length is calculated as an integral
assuming a function mode definition.
arcLen(List1,Var,Start,End)⇒list
Returns a list of the arc lengths of each
element of List1 from Start to End with
respect to Var.

arcsec() See sec/(), page 159.

arcsech() See sech/(), page 159.

arcsin() See sin/(), page 169.

arcsinh() See sinh/(), page 170.

arctan() See tan/(), page 184.

Alphabetical Listing 15
 arctanh() See tanh/(), page 186.

augment() Catalogue >

augment(List1, List2)⇒list
Returns a new list that is List2 appended
to the end of List1.
augment(Matrix1, Matrix2)⇒matrix
Returns a new matrix that is Matrix2
appended to Matrix1. When the “,”
character is used, the matrices must
have equal row dimensions, and Matrix2
is appended to Matrix1 as new columns.
Does not alter Matrix1 or Matrix2.

avgRC() Catalogue >

avgRC(Expr1, Var [=Value] [,
Step])⇒expression
avgRC(Expr1, Var [=Value] [,
List1])⇒list
avgRC(List1, Var [=Value] [,
Step])⇒list
avgRC(Matrix1, Var [=Value] [,
Step])⇒matrix
Returns the forward-difference quotient
(average rate of change).
Expr1 can be a user-defined function
name (see Func).
When Value is specified, it overrides any
prior variable assignment or any current
“|” substitution for the variable.
Step is the step value. If Step is omitted,
it defaults to 0.001.
Note that the similar function centralDiff
() uses the central-difference quotient.

16 Alphabetical Listing
B

bal() Catalogue >

bal(NPmt,N,I,PV ,[Pmt], [FV], [PpY],
[CpY], [PmtAt], [roundValue])⇒value
bal(NPmt,amortTable)⇒value
Amortisation function that calculates
schedule balance after a specified
payment.
N, I, PV, Pmt, FV, PpY, CpY and PmtAt
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 197.
NPmt specifies the payment number
after which you want the data
calculated.
N, I, PV, Pmt, FV, PpY, CpY and PmtAt
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 197.
• If you omit Pmt, it defaults to
Pmt=tvmPmt
(N,I,PV,FV,PpY,CpY,PmtAt).
• If you omit FV, it defaults to FV=0.
• The defaults for PpY, CpY and PmtAt
are the same as for the TVM functions.
roundValue specifies the number of
decimal places for rounding. Default=2.
bal(NPmt,amortTable) calculates the
balance after payment number NPmt,
based on amortisation table
amortTable. The amortTable argument
must be a matrix in the form described
under amortTbl(), page 8.
Note: See also GInt() and GPrn(), page
229.

4Base2 Catalogue >

Integer1 4Base2⇒integer

Alphabetical Listing 17
 4Base2 Catalogue >
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>Base2.
Converts Integer1 to a binary number.
Binary or hexadecimal numbers always
have a 0b or 0h prefix, respectively. Use
a zero, not the letter O, followed by b or
h.
0b binaryNumber
0h hexadecimalNumber
A binary number can have up to 64
digits. A hexadecimal number can have
up to 16.
Without a prefix, Integer1 is treated as
decimal (base 10). The result is displayed
in binary, regardless of the Base mode.
Negative numbers are displayed in
“two's complement” form. For example,
N1 is displayed as
0hFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF in Hex base mode
0b111...111 (64 1’s) in Binary base
mode
N263 is displayed as
0h8000000000000000 in Hex base
mode 0b100...000 (63 zeroes) in Binary
base mode
If you enter a decimal integer that is
outside the range of a signed, 64-bit
binary form, a symmetric modulo
operation is used to bring the value into
the appropriate range. Consider the
following examples of values outside the
range.
263 becomes N263 and is displayed as
0h8000000000000000 in Hex base
mode 0b100...000 (63 zeroes) in Binary
base mode
264 becomes 0 and is displayed as

18 Alphabetical Listing
4Base2 Catalogue >
0h0 in Hex base mode
0b0 in Binary base mode
N263 N 1 becomes 263 N 1 and is
displayed as
0h7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF in Hex base mode
0b111...111 (64 1’s) in Binary base
mode

4Base10 Catalogue >

Integer1 4Base10⇒integer
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>Base10.
Converts Integer1 to a decimal (base 10)
number. A binary or hexadecimal entry
must always have a 0b or 0h prefix,
respectively.
0b binaryNumber
0h hexadecimalNumber
Zero, not the letter O, followed by b or h.
A binary number can have up to 64
digits. A hexadecimal number can have
up to 16.
Without a prefix, Integer1 is treated as
decimal. The result is displayed in
decimal, regardless of the Base mode.

4Base16 Catalogue >

Integer1 4Base16⇒integer
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>Base16.
Converts Integer1 to a hexadecimal
number. Binary or hexadecimal numbers
always have a 0b or 0h prefix,
respectively.

Alphabetical Listing 19
 4Base16 Catalogue >
0b binaryNumber
0h hexadecimalNumber
Zero, not the letter O, followed by b or h.
A binary number can have up to 64
digits. A hexadecimal number can have
up to 16.
Without a prefix, Integer1 is treated as
decimal (base 10). The result is displayed
in hexadecimal, regardless of the Base
mode.
If you enter a decimal integer that is too
large for a signed, 64-bit binary form, a
symmetric modulo operation is used to
bring the value into the appropriate
range. For more information, see 4Base2,
page 17.

binomCdf() Catalogue >

binomCdf(n,p)⇒list
binomCdf(n,p,lowBound,upBound)⇒number if
lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if
lowBound and upBound are lists
binomCdf(n,p,upBound)for P(0{X
{upBound)⇒number if upBound is a number, list if
upBound is a list
Computes a cumulative probability for the discrete
binomial distribution with n number of trials and
probability p of success on each trial.
For P(X { upBound), set lowBound=0

binomPdf() Catalogue >

binomPdf(n,p)⇒list
binomPdf(n,p,XVal)⇒number if XVal is a number,
list if XVal is a list
Computes a probability for the discrete binomial
distribution with n number of trials and probability p
of success on each trial.

20 Alphabetical Listing
C

ceiling() Catalogue >

ceiling(Expr1) ⇒ integer
Returns the nearest integer that is ≥ the
argument.
The argument can be a real or a complex
number.
Note: See also floor().
ceiling(List1) ⇒ list
ceiling(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns a list or matrix of the ceiling of
each element.

centralDiff() Catalogue >

centralDiff(Expr1,Var [=Value][,Step])
⇒ expression
centralDiff(Expr1,Var
[,Step])|Var=Value ⇒ expression
centralDiff(Expr1,Var [=Value][,List])
⇒ list
centralDiff(List1,Var [=Value][,Step])
⇒ list
centralDiff(Matrix1,Var [=Value]
[,Step]) ⇒ matrix
Returns the numerical derivative using
the central difference quotient formula.
When Value is specified, it overrides any
prior variable assignment or any current
“|” substitution for the variable.
Step is the step value. If Step is omitted,
it defaults to 0.001.
When using List1 or Matrix1, the
operation gets mapped across the values
in the list or across the matrix elements.
Note: See also avgRC() and d().

Alphabetical Listing 21
 cFactor() Catalogue >
cFactor(Expr1[,Var]) ⇒ expression
cFactor(List1[,Var]) ⇒ list
cFactor(Matrix1[,Var]) ⇒ matrix
cFactor(Expr1) returns Expr1 factored
with respect to all of its variables over a
common denominator.
Expr1 is factored as much as possible
toward linear rational factors even if this
introduces new non-real numbers. This
alternative is appropriate if you want
factorization with respect to more than
one variable.
cFactor(Expr1,Var) returns Expr1
factored with respect to variable Var.
Expr1 is factored as much as possible
toward factors that are linear in Var,
with perhaps non-real constants, even if
it introduces irrational constants or
subexpressions that are irrational in
other variables.
The factors and their terms are sorted
with Var as the main variable. Similar
powers of Var are collected in each
factor. Include Var if factorization is
needed with respect to only that variable
and you are willing to accept irrational
expressions in any other variables to
increase factorization with respect to
Var. There might be some incidental
factoring with respect to other variables.
For the Auto setting of the Auto or
Approximate mode, including Var also
permits approximation with floating-
point coefficients where irrational
coefficients cannot be explicitly
expressed concisely in terms of the built-
in functions. Even when there is only one
variable, including Var might yield more To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
complete factorization. 7 and 8 to move the cursor.

Note: See also factor().

22 Alphabetical Listing
char() Catalogue >
char(Integer) ⇒ character
Returns a character string containing the
character numbered Integer from the
handheld character set. The valid range
for Integer is 0–65535.

charPoly() Catalogue >

charPoly(squareMatrix,Var) ⇒
polynomial expression
charPoly(squareMatrix,Expr) ⇒
polynomial expression
charPoly(squareMatrix1,Matrix2) ⇒
polynomial expression
Returns the characteristic polynomial of
squareMatrix. The characteristic
polynomial of n×n matrix A, denoted by
pA(λ), is the polynomial defined by
pA(λ) = det(λ•I−A)

where I denotes the n×n identity matrix.

squareMatrix1 and squareMatrix2 must
have the equal dimensions.

χ22way Catalogue >

χ22way obsMatrix

chi22way obsMatrix
Computes a χ2 test for association on the two-way
table of counts in the observed matrix obsMatrix. A
summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable. (page 178)
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
matrix, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.χ2 Chi square stat: sum (observed - expected)2/expected

Alphabetical Listing 23
Output variable Description
stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom for the chi square statistics

stat.ExpMat Matrix of expected elemental count table, assuming null hypothesis

stat.CompMat Matrix of elemental chi square statistic contributions

χ2Cdf() Catalogue >

χ2Cdf(lowBound,upBound,df) ⇒ number if
lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if
lowBound and upBound are lists
chi2Cdf(lowBound,upBound,df) ⇒ number if
lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if
lowBound and upBound are lists
Computes the χ2 distribution probability between
lowBound and upBound for the specified degrees of
freedom df.
For P(X ≤ upBound), set lowBound = 0.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 255.

χ2GOF Catalogue >

χ2GOF obsList,expList,df

chi2GOF obsList,expList,df
Performs a test to confirm that sample data is from a
population that conforms to a specified distribution.
obsList is a list of counts and must contain integers. A
summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable. (See page 178.)
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.χ2 Chi square stat: sum((observed - expected)2/expected

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

24 Alphabetical Listing
Output variable Description
stat.df Degrees of freedom for the chi square statistics

stat.CompList Elemental chi square statistic contributions

χ2Pdf() Catalogue >

χ2Pdf(XVal,df) ⇒ number if XVal is a number, list if
XVal is a list
chi2Pdf(XVal,df) ⇒ number if XVal is a number, list
if XVal is a list
Computes the probability density function (pdf) for
the χ2 distribution at a specified XVal value for the
specified degrees of freedom df.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 255.

ClearAZ Catalogue >

ClearAZ
Clears all single-character variables in
the current problem space.
If one or more of the variables are
locked, this command displays an error
message and deletes only the unlocked
variables. See unLock, page 200.

ClrErr Catalogue >

ClrErr For an example of ClrErr, See
Example 2 under the Try
Clears the error status and sets system variable command, page 193.
errCode to zero.
The Else clause of the Try...Else...EndTry block should
use ClrErr or PassErr. If the error is to be processed or
ignored, use ClrErr. If what to do with the error is not
known, use PassErr to send it to the next error
handler. If there are no more pending
Try...Else...EndTry error handlers, the error dialogue
box will be displayed as normal.
Note: See also PassErr, page 133, and Try, page 193.

Alphabetical Listing 25
 ClrErr Catalogue >
Note for entering the example: For instructions on
entering multi-line programme and function
definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

colAugment() Catalogue >

colAugment(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒
matrix
Returns a new matrix that is Matrix2
appended to Matrix1. The matrices
must have equal column dimensions,
and Matrix2 is appended to Matrix1 as
new rows. Does not alter Matrix1 or
Matrix2.

colDim() Catalogue >

colDim(Matrix) ⇒ expression
Returns the number of columns
contained in Matrix.
Note: See also rowDim().

colNorm() Catalogue >

colNorm(Matrix) ⇒ expression
Returns the maximum of the sums of the
absolute values of the elements in the
columns in Matrix.
Note: Undefined matrix elements are not
allowed. See also rowNorm().

comDenom() Catalogue >

comDenom(Expr1[,Var]) ⇒ expression
comDenom(List1[,Var]) ⇒ list
comDenom(Matrix1[,Var]) ⇒ matrix
comDenom(Expr1) returns a reduced
ratio of a fully expanded numerator over
a fully expanded denominator.

26 Alphabetical Listing
comDenom() Catalogue >
comDenom(Expr1,Var) returns a
reduced ratio of numerator and
denominator expanded with respect to
Var. The terms and their factors are
sorted with Var as the main variable.
Similar powers of Var are collected.
There might be some incidental factoring
of the collected coefficients. Compared
to omitting Var, this often saves time,
memory, and screen space, while making
the expression more comprehensible. It
also makes subsequent operations on
the result faster and less likely to
exhaust memory.
If Var does not occur in Expr1,
comDenom(Expr1,Var) returns a
reduced ratio of an unexpanded
numerator over an unexpanded
denominator. Such results usually save
even more time, memory, and screen
space. Such partially factored results also
make subsequent operations on the
result much faster and much less likely
to exhaust memory.
Even when there is no denominator, the
comden function is often a fast way to
achieve partial factorization if factor() is
too slow or if it exhausts memory.
Hint: Enter this comden() function
definition and routinely try it as an
alternative to comDenom() and factor().

completeSquare () Catalogue >

completeSquare(ExprOrEqn, Var) ⇒
expression or equation
completeSquare(ExprOrEqn,
Var^Power) ⇒ expression or equation
completeSquare(ExprOrEqn, Var1,
Var2 [,...]) ⇒ expression or equation
completeSquare(ExprOrEqn, {Var1,
Var2 [,...]}) ⇒ expression or equation

Alphabetical Listing 27
 completeSquare () Catalogue >
Converts a quadratic polynomial
expression of the form a•x2+b•x+c into
the form a•(x-h)2+k
- or -
Converts a quadratic equation of the
form a•x2+b•x+c=d into the form a•(x-
h)2=k
The first argument must be a quadratic
expression or equation in standard form
with respect to the second argument.
The Second argument must be a single
univariate term or a single univariate
term raised to a rational power, for
example x, y2, or z(1/3).
The third and fourth syntax attempt to
complete the square with respect to
variables Var1, Var2 [,… ]).

conj() Catalogue >

conj(Expr1) ⇒ expression

conj(List1) ⇒ list
conj(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns the complex conjugate of the
argument.
Note: All undefined variables are treated
as real variables.

constructMat() Catalogue >

constructMat
(Expr,Var1,Var2,numRows,numCols)
⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix based on the
arguments.
Expr is an expression in variables Var1
and Var2. Elements in the resulting
matrix are formed by evaluating Expr for
each incremented value of Var1 and
Var2.

28 Alphabetical Listing
constructMat() Catalogue >
Var1 is automatically incremented from
1 through numRows. Within each row,
Var2 is incremented from 1 through
numCols.

CopyVar Catalogue >

CopyVar Var1, Var2
CopyVar Var1., Var2.
CopyVar Var1, Var2 copies the value of
variable Var1 to variable Var2, creating
Var2 if necessary. Variable Var1 must
have a value.
If Var1 is the name of an existing user-
defined function, copies the definition of
that function to function Var2. Function
Var1 must be defined.
Var1 must meet the variable-naming
requirements or must be an indirection
expression that simplifies to a variable
name meeting the requirements.
CopyVar Var1., Var2. copies all
members of the Var1. variable group to
the Var2. group, creating Var2. if
necessary.
Var1. must be the name of an existing
variable group, such as the statistics
stat.nn results, or variables created using
the LibShortcut() function. If Var2.
already exists, this command replaces all
members that are common to both
groups and adds the members that do
not already exist. If one or more
members of Var2. are locked, all
members of Var2. are left unchanged.

corrMat() Catalogue >

corrMat(List1,List2[,…[,List20]])
Computes the correlation matrix for the augmented
matrix [List1, List2, ..., List20].

Alphabetical Listing 29
 ►cos Catalogue >
Expr ►cos
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>cos.
Represents Expr in terms of cosine. This
is a display conversion operator. It can
be used only at the end of the entry line.
►cos reduces all powers of
sin(...) modulo 1−cos(...)^2
so that any remaining powers of cos(...)
have exponents in the range (0, 2). Thus,
the result will be free of sin(...) if and
only if sin(...) occurs in the given
expression only to even powers.
Note: This conversion operator is not
supported in Degree or Gradian Angle
modes. Before using it, make sure that
the Angle mode is set to Radians and
that Expr does not contain explicit
references to degree or gradian angles.

cos() µ key
cos(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

cos(List1) ⇒ list
cos(Expr1) returns the cosine of the
argument as an expression.
cos(List1) returns a list of the cosines of
all elements in List1.
Note: The argument is interpreted as a
degree, gradian or radian angle, In Gradian angle mode:
according to the current angle mode
setting. You can use °, G, or r to override
the angle mode temporarily.

In Radian angle mode:

30 Alphabetical Listing
cos() µ key

cos(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix cosine of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the cosine of each element.
When a scalar function f(A) operates on
squareMatrix1 (A), the result is
calculated by the algorithm:
Compute the eigenvalues (λi) and
eigenvectors (Vi) of A.
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
Also, it cannot have symbolic variables
that have not been assigned a value.
Form the matrices:

Then A = X B X-1 and f(A) = X f(B) X-1. For

example, cos(A) = X cos(B) X-1 where:
cos(B) =

All computations are performed using

floating-point arithmetic.

cos-1() µ key
cos-1(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

cos-1(List1) ⇒ list

Alphabetical Listing 31
 cos-1() µ key
cos-1(Expr1) returns the angle whose
cosine is Expr1 as an expression. In Gradian angle mode:

cos-1(List1) returns a list of the inverse

cosines of each element of List1.
Note: The result is returned as a degree, In Radian angle mode:
gradian or radian angle, according to the
current angle mode setting.
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing arccos(...).
cos-1(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode and Rectangular
Complex Format:
Returns the matrix inverse cosine of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the inverse cosine of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.
To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
7 and 8 to move the cursor.

cosh() Catalogue >

cosh(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

cosh(List1) ⇒ list
cosh(Expr1) returns the hyperbolic
cosine of the argument as an expression.
cosh(List1) returns a list of the
hyperbolic cosines of each element of
List1.
cosh(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix hyperbolic cosine of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the hyperbolic cosine of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.

32 Alphabetical Listing
cosh-1() Catalogue >
cosh-1(Expr1) ⇒ expression

cosh-1(List1) ⇒ list
cosh-1(Expr1) returns the inverse
hyperbolic cosine of the argument as an
expression.
cosh-1(List1) returns a list of the inverse
hyperbolic cosines of each element of
List1.
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing arccosh(...).
cosh-1(squareMatrix1) ⇒ In Radian angle mode and In Rectangular
squareMatrix Complex Format:

Returns the matrix inverse hyperbolic

cosine of squareMatrix1. This is not the
same as calculating the inverse
hyperbolic cosine of each element. For
information about the calculation
method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
The result always contains floating-point 7 and 8 to move the cursor.
numbers.

cot() µ key
cot(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

cot(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the cotangent of Expr1 or
returns a list of the cotangents of all In Gradian angle mode:
elements in List1.
Note: The argument is interpreted as a
degree, gradian or radian angle,
according to the current angle mode In Radian angle mode:
setting. You can use °, G, or r to override
the angle mode temporarily.

Alphabetical Listing 33
 cot⁻¹() µ key
cot⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

cot-1(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the angle whose cotangent is
Expr1 or returns a list containing the In Gradian angle mode:
inverse cotangents of each element of
List1.
Note: The result is returned as a degree,
gradian or radian angle, according to the In Radian angle mode:
current angle mode setting.
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing arccot(...).

coth() Catalogue >

coth(Expr1) ⇒ expression

coth(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of
Expr1 or returns a list of the hyperbolic
cotangents of all elements of List1.

coth-1() Catalogue >

coth-1(Expr1) ⇒ expression

coth-1(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent
of Expr1 or returns a list containing the
inverse hyperbolic cotangents of each
element of List1.
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing arccoth(...).

34 Alphabetical Listing
count() Catalogue >
count(Value1orList1 [,Value2orList2
[,...]]) ⇒ value
Returns the accumulated count of all
elements in the arguments that evaluate
to numeric values.
Each argument can be an expression,
value, list, or matrix. You can mix data
types and use arguments of various
dimensions. In the last example, only 1/2 and 3+4*i are
counted. The remaining arguments, assuming
For a list, matrix, or range of cells, each x is undefined, do not evaluate to numeric
element is evaluated to determine if it values.
should be included in the count.
Within the Lists & Spreadsheet
application, you can use a range of cells
in place of any argument.
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements,
see page 255.

countif() Catalogue >

countif(List,Criteria) ⇒ value
Returns the accumulated count of all
elements in List that meet the specified Counts the number of elements equal to 3.
Criteria.
Criteria can be:
• A value, expression, or string. For Counts the number of elements equal to
example, 3 counts only those elements “def.”
in List that simplify to the value 3.
• A Boolean expression containing the
symbol ? as a place holder for each
element. For example, ?<5 counts only
those elements in List that are less
than 5. Counts the number of elements equal to x;
this example assumes the variable x is
Within the Lists & Spreadsheet undefined.
application, you can use a range of cells
in place of List.

Counts 1 and 3.

Alphabetical Listing 35
 countif() Catalogue >
Empty (void) elements in the list are
ignored. For more information on empty
elements, see page 255.
Note: See also sumIf(), page 182, and Counts 3, 5, and 7.
frequency(), page 76.

Counts 1, 3, 7, and 9.

cPolyRoots() Catalogue >

cPolyRoots(Poly,Var) ⇒ list
cPolyRoots(ListOfCoeffs) ⇒ list
The first syntax, cPolyRoots(Poly,Var),
returns a list of complex roots of
polynomial Poly with respect to variable
Var.
Poly must be a polynomial in one
variable.
The second syntax, cPolyRoots
(ListOfCoeffs), returns a list of complex
roots for the coefficients in
ListOfCoeffs.
Note: See also polyRoots(), page 137.

crossP() Catalogue >

crossP(List1, List2) ⇒ list
Returns the cross product of List1 and
List2 as a list.
List1 and List2 must have equal
dimension, and the dimension must be
either 2 or 3.
crossP(Vector1, Vector2) ⇒ vector
Returns a row or column vector
(depending on the arguments) that is the
cross product of Vector1 and Vector2.

36 Alphabetical Listing
crossP() Catalogue >
Both Vector1 and Vector2 must be row
vectors, or both must be column vectors.
Both vectors must have equal
dimension, and the dimension must be
either 2 or 3.

csc() µ key
csc(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

csc(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the cosecant of Expr1 or returns
a list containing the cosecants of all In Gradian angle mode:
elements in List1.

In Radian angle mode:

csc-1() µ key
csc-1(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

csc-1(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the angle whose cosecant is
Expr1 or returns a list containing the In Gradian angle mode:
inverse cosecants of each element of
List1.
Note: The result is returned as a degree,
gradian or radian angle, according to the In Radian angle mode:
current angle mode setting.
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing arccsc(...).

Alphabetical Listing 37
 csch() Catalogue >
csch(Expr1) ⇒ expression
csch(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the hyperbolic cosecant of
Expr1 or returns a list of the hyperbolic
cosecants of all elements of List1.

csch-1() Catalogue >

csch-1(Expr1) ⇒ expression

csch-1(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosecant
of Expr1 or returns a list containing the
inverse hyperbolic cosecants of each
element of List1.
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing arccsch(...).

cSolve() Catalogue >

cSolve(Equation, Var) ⇒ Boolean
expression
cSolve(Equation, Var=Guess) ⇒
Boolean expression
cSolve(Inequality, Var) ⇒ Boolean
expression

Returns candidate complex solutions of

an equation or inequality for Var. The
goal is to produce candidates for all real
and non-real solutions. Even if Equation
is real, cSolve() allows non-real results in
Real result Complex Format.

38 Alphabetical Listing
cSolve() Catalogue >
cSolve() temporarily sets the domain to
complex during the solution even if the
current domain is real. In the complex
domain, fractional powers having odd
denominators use the principal rather
than the real branch. Consequently,
solutions from solve() to equations
involving such fractional powers are not
necessarily a subset of those from cSolve
().
cSolve() starts with exact symbolic In Display Digits mode of Fix 2:
methods. cSolve() also uses iterative
approximate complex polynomial
factoring, if necessary.
Note: See also cZeros(), solve(), and zeros
().

To see the entire result, press 5 and then use

7 and 8 to move the cursor.

cSolve(Eqn1andEqn2 [and…],
VarOrGuess1, VarOrGuess2 [, … ]) ⇒
Boolean expression
cSolve(SystemOfEqns, VarOrGuess1,
VarOrGuess2 [, …]) ⇒
Boolean expression
Returns candidate complex solutions to
the simultaneous algebraic equations,
where each varOrGuess specifies a
variable that you want to solve for.
Optionally, you can specify an initial
guess for a variable. Each varOrGuess
must have the form:
variable
– or –
variable = real or non-real number
For example, x is valid and so is x=3+i.

Alphabetical Listing 39
 cSolve() Catalogue >
If all of the equations are polynomials
and if you do NOT specify any initial
guesses, cSolve() uses the lexical
Gröbner/Buchberger elimination method
to attempt to determine all complex
solutions.
Complex solutions can include both real
and non-real solutions, as in the example
to the right.

To see the entire result, press 5 and then use

7 and 8 to move the cursor.
Simultaneous polynomial equations can
have extra variables that have no values,
but represent given numeric values that
could be substituted later.
You can also include solution variables
that do not appear in the equations.
These solutions show how families of
solutions might contain arbitrary
constants of the form ck, where k is an
integer suffix from 1 through 255.
For polynomial systems, computation
time or memory exhaustion may depend
strongly on the order in which you list
solution variables. If your initial choice
exhausts memory or your patience, try
rearranging the variables in the
equations and/or varOrGuess list.
If you do not include any guesses and if
any equation is non-polynomial in any
variable but all equations are linear in all
solution variables, cSolve() uses Gaussian
elimination to attempt to determine all
solutions.

40 Alphabetical Listing
cSolve() Catalogue >
If a system is neither polynomial in all of
its variables nor linear in its solution
variables, cSolve() determines at most
one solution using an approximate
iterative method. To do so, the number
of solution variables must equal the
number of equations, and all other
variables in the equations must simplify
to numbers.
A non-real guess is often necessary to
determine a non-real solution. For
convergence, a guess might have to be
rather close to a solution.
To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
7 and 8 to move the cursor.

CubicReg Catalogue >

CubicReg X, Y[, [Freq] [, Category, Include]]
Computes the cubic polynomial regression
y=a•x3+b•x2+c•x+d on lists X and Y with frequency
Freq. A summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 178.)
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 255.

Alphabetical Listing 41
Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a•x3+b•x2+c•x+d

stat.a, stat.b, Regression coefficients

stat.c, stat.d

stat.R2 Coefficient of determination

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

cumulativeSum() Catalogue >

cumulativeSum(List1) ⇒ list
Returns a list of the cumulative sums of
the elements in List1, starting at
element 1.
cumulativeSum(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix of the cumulative sums
of the elements in Matrix1. Each
element is the cumulative sum of the
column from top to bottom.
An empty (void) element in List1 or
Matrix1 produces a void element in the
resulting list or matrix. For more
information on empty elements, see
page 255.

Cycle Catalogue >

Cycle Function listing that sums the integers from 1
to 100 skipping 50.
Transfers control immediately to the
next iteration of the current loop (For,
While, or Loop).
Cycle is not allowed outside the three
looping structures (For, While, or Loop).

42 Alphabetical Listing
Cycle Catalogue >
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

►Cylind Catalogue >

Vector ►Cylind
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>Cylind.
Displays the row or column vector in
cylindrical form [r,∠ θ, z].
Vector must have exactly three
elements. It can be either a row or a
column.

cZeros() Catalogue >

cZeros(Expr, Var) ⇒ list In Display Digits mode of Fix 3:

Returns a list of candidate real and non-

real values of Var that make Expr=0.
cZeros() does this by computing
exp►list(cSolve(Expr=0,Var),Var). To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
Otherwise, cZeros() is similar to zeros(). 7 and 8 to move the cursor.
Note: See also cSolve(), solve(), and zeros
().

cZeros({Expr1, Expr2 [, … ] },
{VarOrGuess1,VarOrGuess2 [, … ] })
⇒ matrix
Returns candidate positions where the
expressions are zero simultaneously.
Each VarOrGuess specifies an unknown
whose value you seek.

Alphabetical Listing 43
 cZeros() Catalogue >
Optionally, you can specify an initial
guess for a variable. Each VarOrGuess
must have the form:
variable
– or –
variable = real or non-real number
For example, x is valid and so is x=3+i.
If all of the expressions are polynomials
and you do NOT specify any initial
guesses, cZeros() uses the lexical
Gröbner/Buchberger elimination method
to attempt to determine all complex
zeros.
Complex zeros can include both real and
non-real zeros, as in the example to the
right.
Each row of the resulting matrix
represents an alternate zero, with the
components ordered the same as the
VarOrGuess list. To extract a row, index
the matrix by [row]. Extract row 2:

Simultaneous polynomials can have

extra variables that have no values, but
represent given numeric values that
could be substituted later.
You can also include unknown variables
that do not appear in the expressions.
These zeros show how families of zeros
might contain arbitrary constants of the
form ck, where k is an integer suffix from
1 through 255.
For polynomial systems, computation
time or memory exhaustion may depend
strongly on the order in which you list
unknowns. If your initial choice exhausts
memory or your patience, try
rearranging the variables in the
expressions and/or VarOrGuess list.

44 Alphabetical Listing
cZeros() Catalogue >
If you do not include any guesses and if
any expression is non-polynomial in any
variable but all expressions are linear in
all unknowns, cZeros() uses Gaussian
elimination to attempt to determine all
zeros.
If a system is neither polynomial in all of
its variables nor linear in its unknowns,
cZeros() determines at most one zero
using an approximate iterative method.
To do so, the number of unknowns must
equal the number of expressions, and all
other variables in the expressions must
simplify to numbers.
A non-real guess is often necessary to
determine a non-real zero. For
convergence, a guess might have to be
rather close to a zero.

dbd() Catalogue >

dbd(date1,date2)⇒value
Returns the number of days between
date1 and date2 using the actual-day-
count method.
date1 and date2 can be numbers or lists
of numbers within the range of the dates
on the standard calendar. If both date1
and date2 are lists, they must be the
same length.
date1 and date2 must be between the
years 1950 through 2049.
You can enter the dates in either of two
formats. The decimal placement
differentiates between the date formats.
MM.DDYY (format used commonly in the
United States)
DDMM.YY (format use commonly in
Europe)

Alphabetical Listing 45
 4DD Catalogue >
Expr1 4DD⇒value In Degree angle mode:

List1 4DD⇒list
Matrix1 4DD⇒matrix
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing @>DD.
Returns the decimal equivalent of the
argument expressed in degrees. The In Gradian angle mode:
argument is a number, list, or matrix that
is interpreted by the Angle mode setting
in gradians, radians or degrees.

In Radian angle mode:

4Decimal Catalogue >

Expression1 4Decimal⇒expression
List1 4Decimal⇒expression
Matrix1 4Decimal⇒expression
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>Decimal.
Displays the argument in decimal form.
This operator can be used only at the
end of the entry line.

Define Catalogue >

Define Var = Expression
Define Function(Param1, Param2, ...) =
Expression
Defines the variable Var or the user-
defined function Function.

46 Alphabetical Listing
Define Catalogue >
Parameters, such as Param1, provide
place holders for passing arguments to
the function. When calling a user-
defined function, you must supply
arguments (for example, values or
variables) that correspond to the
parameters. When called, the function
evaluates Expression using the supplied
arguments.
Var and Function cannot be the name
of a system variable or built-in function
or command.
Note: This form of Define is equivalent to
executing the expression: expression &
Function(Param1,Param2).
Define Function(Param1, Param2, ...) =
Func
Block
EndFunc
Define Program(Param1, Param2, ...) =
Prgm
Block
EndPrgm
In this form, the user-defined function or
programme can execute a block of
multiple statements.
Block can be either a single statement or
a series of statements on separate lines.
Block also can include expressions and
instructions (such as If, Then, Else and
For).
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.
Note: See also Define LibPriv, page 47,
and Define LibPub, page 48.

Define LibPriv Catalogue >

Define LibPriv Var = Expression

Alphabetical Listing 47
 Define LibPriv Catalogue >
Define LibPriv Function(Param1, Param2, ...) =
Expression
Define LibPriv Function(Param1, Param2, ...) = Func
Block
EndFunc
Define LibPriv Program(Param1, Param2, ...) =
Prgm
Block
EndPrgm
Operates the same as Define, except defines a private
library variable, function, or programme. Private
functions and programs do not appear in the
Catalogue.
Note: See also Define, page 46, and Define LibPub,
page 48.

Define LibPub Catalogue >

Define LibPub Var = Expression
Define LibPub Function(Param1, Param2, ...) =
Expression
Define LibPub Function(Param1, Param2, ...) = Func
Block
EndFunc
Define LibPub Program(Param1, Param2, ...) =
Prgm
Block
EndPrgm
Operates the same as Define, except defines a public
library variable, function, or programme. Public
functions and programs appear in the Catalogue after
the library has been saved and refreshed.
Note: See also Define, page 46, and Define LibPriv,
page 47.

deltaList() See @List(), page 104.

48 Alphabetical Listing
 See @tmpCnv(), page
deltaTmpCnv() 191.

DelVar Catalogue >

DelVar Var1[, Var2] [, Var3] ...
DelVar Var.
Deletes the specified variable or variable
group from memory.
If one or more of the variables are
locked, this command displays an error
message and deletes only the unlocked
variables. See unLock, page 200.
DelVar Var. deletes all members of the
Var. variable group (such as the statistics
stat.nn results or variables created using
the LibShortcut() function). The dot (.) in
this form of the DelVar command limits
it to deleting a variable group; the simple
variable Var is not affected.

delVoid() Catalogue >

delVoid(List1)⇒list
Returns a list that has the contents of
List1 with all empty (void) elements
removed.
For more information on empty
elements, see page 255.

derivative() See d(), page 224.

Alphabetical Listing 49
 deSolve() Catalogue >
deSolve(1stOr2ndOrderODE, Var,
depVar) ⇒a general solution
Returns an equation that explicitly or
implicitly specifies a general solution to the
1st- or 2nd-order ordinary differential
equation (ODE). In the ODE:

• Use a prime symbol (press º) to denote

the 1st derivative of the dependent
variable with respect to the independent
variable.
• Use two prime symbols to denote the
corresponding second derivative.
The prime symbol is used for derivatives
within deSolve() only. In other cases, use d
().
The general solution of a 1st-order equation
contains an arbitrary constant of the form
ck, where k is an integer suffix from 1
through 255. The solution of a 2nd-order
equation contains two such constants.
Apply solve() to an implicit solution if you
want to try to convert it to one or more
equivalent explicit solutions.
When comparing your results with textbook
or manual solutions, be aware that different
methods introduce arbitrary constants at
different points in the calculation, which
may produce different general solutions.

deSolve(1stOrderODEandinitCond, Var,
depVar) ⇒a particular solution
Returns a particular solution that satisfies
1stOrderODE and initCond. This is usually
easier than determining a general solution,
substituting initial values, solving for the
arbitrary constant, and then substituting
that value into the general solution.
initCond is an equation of the form:
depVar (initialIndependentValue) =
initialDependentValue

50 Alphabetical Listing
deSolve() Catalogue >
The initialIndependentValue and
initialDependentValue can be variables
such as x0 and y0 that have no stored
values. Implicit differentiation can help
verify implicit solutions.
deSolve
(
2ndOrderODE
andinitCond1andinitCond2, Var,
depVar)⇒a particular solution
Returns a particular solution that satisfies
2nd Order ODE and has a specified value
of the dependent variable and its first
derivative at one point.
For initCond1, use the form:
depVar (initialIndependentValue) =
initialDependentValue
For initCond2, use the form:
depVar (initialIndependentValue) =
initial1stDerivativeValue
deSolve
(
2ndOrderODE
andbndCond1andbndCond2, Var,
depVar)⇒a particular solution
Returns a particular solution that satisfies
2ndOrderODE and has specified values at
two different points.

Alphabetical Listing 51
 det() Catalogue >
det(squareMatrix[,
Tolerance])⇒expression
Returns the determinant of
squareMatrix.
Optionally, any matrix element is treated
as zero if its absolute value is less than
Tolerance. This tolerance is used only if
the matrix has floating-point entries and
does not contain any symbolic variables
that have not been assigned a value.
Otherwise, Tolerance is ignored.

• If you use /· or set the Auto or

Approximate mode to Approximate,
computations are done using floating-
point arithmetic.
• If Tolerance is omitted or not used,
the default tolerance is calculated as:

5EM14 ·max(dim(squareMatrix))·
rowNorm(squareMatrix)

diag() Catalogue >

diag(List)⇒matrix
diag(rowMatrix)⇒matrix
diag(columnMatrix)⇒matrix
Returns a matrix with the values in the
argument list or matrix in its main
diagonal.
diag(squareMatrix)⇒rowMatrix
Returns a row matrix containing the
elements from the main diagonal of
squareMatrix.
squareMatrix must be square.

dim() Catalogue >

dim(List)⇒integer
Returns the dimension of List.

52 Alphabetical Listing
dim() Catalogue >
dim(Matrix)⇒list
Returns the dimensions of matrix as a
two-element list {rows, columns}.
dim(String)⇒integer
Returns the number of characters
contained in character string String.

Disp Catalogue >

Disp exprOrString1 [, exprOrString2] ...
Displays the arguments in the
Calculator history. The arguments are
displayed in succession, with thin spaces
as separators.
Useful mainly in programs and functions
to ensure the display of intermediate
calculations.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

DispAt Catalogue >

DispAt int,expr1 [,expr2 ...] ...
DispAt allows you to specify the line Example
where the specified expression or
string will be displayed on the
screen.
The line number can be specified as
an expression.
Please note that the line number is
not for the entire screen but for the
area immediately following the
command/programme.

Alphabetical Listing 53
 DispAt Catalogue >
This command allows dashboard-like
output from programmes where the
value of an expression or from a
sensor reading is updated on the
same line.
DispAtand Disp can be used within
the same programme.
Note: The maximum number is set to
8 since that matches a screen-full of
lines on the handheld screen - as
long as the lines don't have 2D maths
expressions. The exact number of
lines depends on the content of the Illustrative examples:
displayed information. Define z()= Output
Prgm z()
For n,1,3 Iteration 1:
DispAt 1,"N: ",n Line 1: N:1
Disp "Hello" Line 2: Hello
EndFor
EndPrgm Iteration 2:
Line 1: N:2
Line 2: Hello
Line 3: Hello

Iteration 3:
Line 1: N:3
Line 2: Hello
Line 3: Hello
Line 4: Hello
Define z1()= z1()
Prgm Line 1: N:3
For n,1,3 Line 2: Hello
DispAt 1,"N: ",n Line 3: Hello
EndFor Line 4: Hello
Line 5: Hello
For n,1,4
Disp "Hello"
EndFor
EndPrgm

54 Alphabetical Listing
 DispAt Catalogue >

Error conditions:

Error Message Description

DispAt line number must be between 1 and 8 Expression evaluates the line number
outside the range 1-8 (inclusive)
Too few arguments The function or command is missing one
or more arguments.
No arguments Same as current 'syntax error' dialogue
Too many arguments Limit argument. Same error as Disp.
Invalid data type First argument must be a number.
Void: DispAt void "Hello World" Datatype error is thrown
for the void (if the callback is defined)
Conversion operator: DispAt 2_ft @> _m, CAS: Datatype Error is thrown (if the
"Hello World" callback is defined)
Numeric: Conversion will be evaluated
and if the result is a valid argument,
DispAt print the string at the result line.

4DMS Catalogue >

Expr 4DMS In Degree angle mode:

List 4DMS
Matrix 4DMS
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>DMS.
Interprets the argument as an angle and
displays the equivalent DMS
(DDDDDD¡MM'SS.ss'') number. See ¡, ', ''
(page 232) for DMS (degree, minutes,
seconds) format.
Note: 4DMS will convert from radians to
degrees when used in radian mode. If
the input is followed by a degree symbol
¡ , no conversion will occur. You can use
4DMS only at the end of an entry line.

Alphabetical Listing 55
 domain() Catalogue >
domain(Expr1, Var)⇒expression
Returns the domain of Expr1 with respect
to Var.
domain() can be used to examine domains
of functions. It is restricted to real and
finite domain.
This functionality has limitations due to
shortcomings of computer algebra
simplification and solver algorithms.
Certain functions cannot be used as
arguments for domain(), regardless of
whether they appear explicitly or within
user-defined variables and functions. In the
following example, the expression cannot
be simplified because ‰() is a disallowed
function.

dominantTerm() Catalogue >

dominantTerm(Expr1, Var [,
Point])⇒expression
dominantTerm(Expr1, Var [, Point]) |
Var>Point ⇒expression
dominantTerm(Expr1, Var [, Point]) |
Var<Point ⇒expression

56 Alphabetical Listing
dominantTerm() Catalogue >
Returns the dominant term of a power
series representation of Expr1 expanded
about Point. The dominant term is the
one whose magnitude grows most
rapidly near Var = Point. The resulting
power of (Var N Point) can have a
negative and/or fractional exponent. The
coefficient of this power can include
logarithms of (Var N Point) and other
functions of Var that are dominated by
all powers of (Var N Point) having the
same exponent sign.
Point defaults to 0. Point can be ˆ or
Nˆ, in which cases the dominant term
will be the term having the largest
exponent of Var rather than the smallest
exponent of Var.
dominantTerm(…) returns
“dominantTerm(…)” if it is unable to
determine such a representation, such
as for essential singularities such as sin
(1/z) at z=0, eN1/z at z=0, or ez at z = ˆ or
Nˆ.
If the series or one of its derivatives has
a jump discontinuity at Point, the result
is likely to contain sub-expressions of the
form sign(…) or abs(…) for a real
expansion variable or (-1)floor(…angle(…)…)
for a complex expansion variable, which
is one ending with “_”. If you intend to
use the dominant term only for values
on one side of Point, then append to
dominantTerm(...) the appropriate one of
“| Var > Point”, “| Var < Point”, “| “Var
| Point”, or “Var { Point” to obtain a
simpler result.
dominantTerm() distributes over 1st-
argument lists and matrices.

Alphabetical Listing 57
 dominantTerm() Catalogue >
dominantTerm() is useful when you want
to know the simplest possible expression
that is asymptotic to another expression
as Var " Point. dominantTerm() is also
useful when it isn’t obvious what the
degree of the first non-zero term of a
series will be, and you don’t want to
iteratively guess either interactively or
by a programme loop.
Note: See also series(), page 162.

dotP() Catalogue >

dotP(List1, List2)⇒expression
Returns the “dot” product of two lists.
dotP(Vector1, Vector2)⇒expression
Returns the “dot” product of two
vectors.
Both must be row vectors, or both must
be column vectors.

e^() u key
e^(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Returns e raised to the Expr1 power.
Note: See also e exponent template, page
2.

Note: Pressing u to display e^( is

different from pressing the character E
on the keyboard.
You can enter a complex number in reiθ
polar form. However, use this form in
Radian angle mode only; it causes a
Domain error in Degree or Gradian angle
mode.
e^(List1) ⇒ list

58 Alphabetical Listing
e^() u key
Returns e raised to the power of each
element in List1.
e^(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix
Returns the matrix exponential of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating e raised to the power of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.

eff() Catalogue >

eff(nominalRate,CpY) ⇒ value
Financial function that converts the
nominal interest rate nominalRate to an
annual effective rate, given CpY as the
number of compounding periods per
year.
nominalRate must be a real number,
and CpY must be a real number > 0.
Note: See also nom(), page 124.

eigVc() Catalogue >

eigVc(squareMatrix) ⇒ matrix In Rectangular Complex Format:

Returns a matrix containing the

eigenvectors for a real or complex
squareMatrix, where each column in the
result corresponds to an eigenvalue.
Note that an eigenvector is not unique; it
may be scaled by any constant factor.
The eigenvectors are normalized,
meaning that:
if V = [x1, x2, … , xn] To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
7 and 8 to move the cursor.
then x12 + x22 + … + xn2 = 1

Alphabetical Listing 59
 eigVc() Catalogue >
squareMatrix is first balanced with
similarity transformations until the row
and column norms are as close to the
same value as possible. The
squareMatrix is then reduced to upper
Hessenberg form and the eigenvectors
are computed via a Schur factorization.

eigVl() Catalogue >

eigVl(squareMatrix) ⇒ list In Rectangular complex format mode:

Returns a list of the eigenvalues of a real

or complex squareMatrix.
squareMatrix is first balanced with
similarity transformations until the row
and column norms are as close to the
same value as possible. The
squareMatrix is then reduced to upper To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
Hessenberg form and the eigenvalues 7 and 8 to move the cursor.
are computed from the upper
Hessenberg matrix.

Else See If, page 88.

ElseIf Catalogue >

If BooleanExpr1 Then
Block1
ElseIf BooleanExpr2 Then
Block2
⋮
ElseIf BooleanExprN Then
BlockN
EndIf
⋮
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

60 Alphabetical Listing
EndFor See For, page 73.

EndFunc See Func, page 77.

EndIf See If, page 88.

EndLoop See Loop, page 110.

EndPrgm See Prgm, page 139.

EndTry See Try, page 193.

EndWhile See While, page 203.

euler () Catalogue >

euler(Expr, Var, depVar, {Var0, Differential equation:
VarMax}, depVar0, VarStep [, y'=0.001*y*(100-y) and y(0)=10
eulerStep]) ⇒ matrix
euler(SystemOfExpr, Var,
ListOfDepVars, {Var0, VarMax},
ListOfDepVars0, VarStep [,
eulerStep]) ⇒ matrix
To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
euler(ListOfExpr, Var, ListOfDepVars, 7 and 8 to move the cursor.
{Var0, VarMax}, ListOfDepVars0, Compare above result with CAS exact solution
VarStep [, eulerStep]) ⇒ matrix obtained using deSolve() and seqGen():

Alphabetical Listing 61
 euler () Catalogue >
Uses the Euler method to solve the
system

with depVar(Var0)=depVar0 on the

interval [Var0,VarMax]. Returns a
matrix whose first row defines the Var
output values and whose second row
defines the value of the first solution
component at the corresponding Var
values, and so on.
Expr is the right-hand side that defines System of equations:
the ordinary differential equation (ODE).
SystemOfExpr is the system of right-
hand sides that define the system of with y1(0)=2 and y2(0)=5
ODEs (corresponds to order of
dependent variables in ListOfDepVars).
ListOfExpr is a list of right-hand sides
that define the system of ODEs
(corresponds to the order of dependent
variables in ListOfDepVars).
Var is the independent variable.
ListOfDepVars is a list of dependent
variables.
{Var0, VarMax} is a two-element list
that tells the function to integrate from
Var0 to VarMax.
ListOfDepVars0 is a list of initial values
for dependent variables.
VarStep is a nonzero number such that
sign(VarStep) = sign(VarMax-Var0) and
solutions are returned at
Var0+i•VarStep for all i=0,1,2,… such
that Var0+i•VarStep is in
[var0,VarMax] (there may not be a
solution value at VarMax).
eulerStep is a positive integer (defaults
to 1) that defines the number of euler
steps between output values. The actual
step size used by the euler method is
VarStep ⁄ eulerStep.

62 Alphabetical Listing
eval () Hub Menu
eval(Expr) ⇒ string Set the blue element of the RGB LED to half
intensity.
eval() is valid only in the TI-
Innovator™ Hub Command argument of
programming commands Get, GetStr and
Send. The software evaluates expression
Expr and replaces the eval() statement
with the result as a character string. Reset the blue element to OFF.

The argument Expr must simplify to a

real number.
eval() argument must simplify to a real
number.

Programme to fade-in the red element

Execute the programme.

Although eval() does not display its

result, you can view the resulting Hub
command string after executing the
command by inspecting any of the
following special variables.
iostr.SendAns
iostr.GetAns
iostr.GetStrAns
Note: See also Get (page 79), GetStr
(page 85), and Send (page 160).

Alphabetical Listing 63
 exact() Catalogue >
exact(Expr1 [, Tolerance]) ⇒
expression
exact(List1 [, Tolerance]) ⇒ list
exact(Matrix1 [, Tolerance]) ⇒ matrix
Uses Exact mode arithmetic to return,
when possible, the rational-number
equivalent of the argument.
Tolerance specifies the tolerance for the
conversion; the default is 0 (zero).

Exit Catalogue >

Exit Function listing:

Exits the current For, While, or Loop

block.
Exit is not allowed outside the three
looping structures (For, While, or Loop).
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

►exp Catalogue >

Expr►exp
Represents Expr in terms of the natural
exponential e. This is a display
conversion operator. It can be used only
at the end of the entry line.
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>exp.

64 Alphabetical Listing
exp() u key
exp(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Returns e raised to the Expr1 power.
Note: See also e exponent template,
page 2.
You can enter a complex number in reiθ
polar form. However, use this form in
Radian angle mode only; it causes a
Domain error in Degree or Gradian angle
mode.
exp(List1) ⇒ list
Returns e raised to the power of each
element in List1.
exp(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix
Returns the matrix exponential of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating e raised to the power of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.

exp►list() Catalogue >

exp►list(Expr,Var) ⇒ list
Examines Expr for equations that are
separated by the word “or,” and returns
a list containing the right-hand sides of
the equations of the form Var=Expr.
This gives you an easy way to extract
some solution values embedded in the
results of the solve(), cSolve(), fMin(), and
fMax() functions.
Note: exp►list() is not necessary with
the zeros() and cZeros() functions
because they return a list of solution
values directly.
You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing exp@>list(...).

Alphabetical Listing 65
 expand() Catalogue >
expand(Expr1 [, Var]) ⇒ expression
expand(List1 [,Var]) ⇒ list
expand(Matrix1 [,Var]) ⇒ matrix
expand(Expr1) returns Expr1 expanded
with respect to all its variables. The
expansion is polynomial expansion for
polynomials and partial fraction
expansion for rational expressions.
The goal of expand() is to transform
Expr1 into a sum and/or difference of
simple terms. In contrast, the goal of
factor() is to transform Expr1 into a
product and/or quotient of simple
factors.
expand(Expr1,Var) returns Expr1
expanded with respect to Var. Similar
powers of Var are collected. The terms
and their factors are sorted with Var as
the main variable. There might be some
incidental factoring or expansion of the
collected coefficients. Compared to
omitting Var, this often saves time,
memory, and screen space, while making
the expression more comprehensible.

Even when there is only one variable,

using Var might make the denominator
factorization used for partial fraction
expansion more complete.
Hint: For rational expressions, propFrac()
is a faster but less extreme alternative to
expand().
Note: See also comDenom() for an
expanded numerator over an expanded
denominator.

66 Alphabetical Listing
expand() Catalogue >
expand(Expr1,[Var]) also distributes
logarithms and fractional powers
regardless of Var. For increased
distribution of logarithms and fractional
powers, inequality constraints might be
necessary to guarantee that some
factors are nonnegative.
expand(Expr1, [Var]) also distributes
absolute values, sign(), and exponentials,
regardless of Var.
Note: See also tExpand() for
trigonometric angle-sum and multiple-
angle expansion.

expr() Catalogue >

expr(String) ⇒ expression
Returns the character string contained in
String as an expression and immediately
executes it.

ExpReg Catalogue >

ExpReg X, Y [, [Freq] [, Category, Include]]
Computes the exponential regression y = a•(b)x on
lists X and Y with frequency Freq. A summary of
results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page
178.)
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.

Alphabetical Listing 67
 ExpReg Catalogue >
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a•(b)x

stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.r2 Coefficient of linear determination for transformed data

stat.r Correlation coefficient for transformed data (x, ln(y))

stat.Resid Residuals associated with the exponential model

stat.ResidTrans Residuals associated with linear fit of transformed data

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression
based on restrictions of Freq, Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression
based on restrictions of Freq, Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

factor() Catalogue >

factor(Expr1[, Var])⇒expression
factor(List1[,Var])⇒list
factor(Matrix1[,Var])⇒matrix
factor(Expr1) returns Expr1 factored
with respect to all of its variables over a
common denominator.
Expr1 is factored as much as possible
toward linear rational factors without
introducing new non-real
subexpressions. This alternative is
appropriate if you want factorization
with respect to more than one variable.

68 Alphabetical Listing
factor() Catalogue >
factor(Expr1,Var) returns Expr1
factored with respect to variable Var.
Expr1 is factored as much as possible
toward real factors that are linear in Var,
even if it introduces irrational constants
or subexpressions that are irrational in
other variables.
The factors and their terms are sorted
with Var as the main variable. Similar
powers of Var are collected in each
factor. Include Var if factorization is
needed with respect to only that variable
and you are willing to accept irrational
expressions in any other variables to
increase factorization with respect to
Var. There might be some incidental
factoring with respect to other variables.
For the Auto setting of the Auto or
Approximate mode, including Var
permits approximation with floating-
point coefficients where irrational
coefficients cannot be explicitly
expressed concisely in terms of the built-
in functions. Even when there is only one
variable, including Var might yield more
complete factorization.
Note: See also comDenom() for a fast
way to achieve partial factoring when
factor() is not fast enough or if it
exhausts memory.
Note: See also cFactor() for factoring all
the way to complex coefficients in
pursuit of linear factors.
factor(rationalNumber) returns the
rational number factored into primes.
For composite numbers, the computing
time grows exponentially with the
number of digits in the second-largest
factor. For example, factoring a 30-digit
integer could take more than a day, and
factoring a 100-digit number could take
more than a century.

Alphabetical Listing 69
 factor() Catalogue >
To stop a calculation manually,

• Handheld: Hold down the c key

and press · repeatedly.
• Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and
press Enter repeatedly.
• Macintosh®: Hold down the F5 key and
press Enter repeatedly.
• iPad®: The app displays a prompt. You
can continue waiting or cancel.
If you merely want to determine if a
number is prime, use isPrime() instead. It
is much faster, particularly if
rationalNumber is not prime and if the
second-largest factor has more than five
digits.

FCdf() Catalogue >

FCdf
(lowBound,upBound,dfNumer,dfDenom)⇒number if
lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if
lowBound and upBound are lists
FCdf
(lowBound,upBound,dfNumer,dfDenom)⇒number if
lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if
lowBound and upBound are lists
Computes the F distribution probability between
lowBound and upBound for the specified dfNumer
(degrees of freedom) and dfDenom.
For P(X { upBound), set lowBound = 0.

Fill Catalogue >

Fill Expr, matrixVar⇒matrix
Replaces each element in variable
matrixVar with Expr.
matrixVar must already exist.

70 Alphabetical Listing
Fill Catalogue >
Fill Expr, listVar⇒list
Replaces each element in variable
listVar with Expr.
listVar must already exist.

FiveNumSummary Catalogue >

FiveNumSummary X[,[Freq][,Category,Include]]
Provides an abbreviated version of the 1-variable
statistics on list X. A summary of results is stored in
the stat.results variable (page 178).
X represents a list containing the data.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1.
Category is a list of numeric category codes for the
corresponding X data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
An empty (void) element in any of the lists X, Freq,
or Category results in a void for the corresponding
element of all those lists. For more information on
empty elements, see page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.MinX Minimum of x values.

stat.Q1X 1st Quartile of x.

stat.MedianX Median of x.

stat.Q3X 3rd Quartile of x.

stat.MaxX Maximum of x values.

floor() Catalogue >

floor(Expr1)⇒integer

Alphabetical Listing 71
 floor() Catalogue >
Returns the greatest integer that is { the
argument. This function is identical to int
().
The argument can be a real or a complex
number.
floor(List1)⇒list
floor(Matrix1)⇒matrix
Returns a list or matrix of the floor of
each element.
Note: See also ceiling() and int().

fMax() Catalogue >

fMax(Expr, Var)⇒Boolean expression
fMax(Expr, Var,lowBound)
fMax(Expr, Var,lowBound,upBound)
fMax(Expr, Var) | lowBound{Var
{upBound
Returns a Boolean expression specifying
candidate values of Var that maximise
Expr or locate its least upper bound.
You can use the constraint (“|”) operator
to restrict the solution interval and/or
specify other constraints.
For the Approximate setting of the Auto
or Approximate mode, fMax() iteratively
searches for one approximate local
maximum. This is often faster,
particularly if you use the “|” operator to
constrain the search to a relatively small
interval that contains exactly one local
maximum.
Note: See also fMin() and max().

72 Alphabetical Listing
fMin() Catalogue >
fMin(Expr, Var)⇒Boolean expression
fMin(Expr, Var,lowBound)
fMin(Expr, Var,lowBound,upBound)
fMin(Expr, Var) | lowBound{Var
{upBound
Returns a Boolean expression specifying
candidate values of Var that minimise
Expr or locate its greatest lower bound.
You can use the constraint (“|”) operator
to restrict the solution interval and/or
specify other constraints.
For the Approximate setting of the Auto
or Approximate mode, fMin() iteratively
searches for one approximate local
minimum. This is often faster,
particularly if you use the “|” operator to
constrain the search to a relatively small
interval that contains exactly one local
minimum.
Note: See also fMax() and min().

For Catalogue >

For Var, Low, High [, Step]
Block
EndFor
Executes the statements in Block
iteratively for each value of Var, from
Low to High, in increments of Step.
Var must not be a system variable.
Step can be positive or negative. The
default value is 1.
Block can be either a single statement or
a series of statements separated with
the “:” character.

Alphabetical Listing 73
 For Catalogue >
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

format() Catalogue >

format(Expr[, formatString])⇒string
Returns Expr as a character string based
on the format template.
Expr must simplify to a number.
formatString is a string and must be in
the form: “F[n]”, “S[n]”, “E[n]”, “G[n][c]”,
where [ ] indicate optional portions.
F[n]: Fixed format. n is the number of
digits to display after the decimal point.
S[n]: Scientific format. n is the number of
digits to display after the decimal point.
E[n]: Engineering format. n is the
number of digits after the first significant
digit. The exponent is adjusted to a
multiple of three, and the decimal point
is moved to the right by zero, one, or
two digits.
G[n][c]: Same as fixed format but also
separates digits to the left of the radix
into groups of three. c specifies the
group separator character and defaults
to a comma. If c is a period, the radix will
be shown as a comma.
[Rc]: Any of the above specifiers may be
suffixed with the Rc radix flag, where c is
a single character that specifies what to
substitute for the radix point.

fPart() Catalogue >

fPart(Expr1)⇒expression
fPart(List1)⇒list

74 Alphabetical Listing
fPart() Catalogue >
fPart(Matrix1)⇒matrix
Returns the fractional part of the
argument.
For a list or matrix, returns the fractional
parts of the elements.
The argument can be a real or a complex
number.

FPdf() Catalogue >

FPdf(XVal,dfNumer,dfDenom)⇒number if XVal is a
number, list if XVal is a list
Computes the F distribution probability at XVal for
the specified dfNumer (degrees of freedom) and
dfDenom.

freqTable4list() Catalogue >

freqTable4list
(List1,freqIntegerList)⇒list
Returns a list containing the elements
from List1 expanded according to the
frequencies in freqIntegerList. This
function can be used for building a
frequency table for the Data & Statistics
application.
List1 can be any valid list.
freqIntegerList must have the same
dimension as List1 and must contain
non-negative integer elements only.
Each element specifies the number of
times the corresponding List1 element
will be repeated in the result list. A value
of zero excludes the corresponding List1
element.
Note: You can insert this function from
the computer keyboard by typing
freqTable@>list(...).
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements,
see page 255.

Alphabetical Listing 75
 frequency() Catalogue >
frequency(List1,binsList)⇒list
Returns a list containing counts of the
elements in List1. The counts are based
on ranges (bins) that you define in
binsList.
If binsList is {b(1), b(2), …, b(n)}, the Explanation of result:
specified ranges are {?{b(1), b(1)<?{b
2 elements from Datalist are {2.5
(2),…,b(n-1)<?{b(n), b(n)>?}. The
resulting list is one element longer than 4 elements from Datalist are >2.5 and {4.5
binsList.
3 elements from Datalist are >4.5
Each element of the result corresponds
to the number of elements from List1 The element “hello” is a string and cannot be
that are in the range of that bin. placed in any of the defined bins.
Expressed in terms of the countIf()
function, the result is { countIf(list, ?{b
(1)), countIf(list, b(1)<?{b(2)), …, countIf
(list, b(n-1)<?{b(n)), countIf(list, b(n)>?)}.
Elements of List1 that cannot be “placed
in a bin” are ignored. Empty (void)
elements are also ignored. For more
information on empty elements, see
page 255.
Within the Lists & Spreadsheet
application, you can use a range of cells
in place of both arguments.
Note: See also countIf(), page 35.

FTest_2Samp Catalogue >

FTest_2Samp List1,List2[,Freq1[,Freq2[,Hypoth]]]
FTest_2Samp List1,List2[,Freq1[,Freq2[,Hypoth]]]
(Data list input)
FTest_2Samp sx1,n1,sx2,n2[,Hypoth]
FTest_2Samp sx1,n1,sx2,n2[,Hypoth]
(Summary stats input)
Performs a two-sample F test. A summary of results
is stored in the stat.results variable (page 178).

76 Alphabetical Listing
FTest_2Samp Catalogue >
For Ha: s1 > s2, set Hypoth>0
For Ha: s1 ƒ s2 (default), set Hypoth =0
For Ha: s1 < s2, set Hypoth<0
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.F Calculated F statistic for the data sequence

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.dfNumer numerator degrees of freedom = n1-1

stat.dfDenom denominator degrees of freedom = n2-1

stat.sx1, stat.sx2 Sample standard deviations of the data sequences in List 1 and List 2

stat.x1_bar Sample means of the data sequences in List 1 and List 2

stat.x2_bar

stat.n1, stat.n2 Size of the samples

Func Catalogue >

Func Define a piecewise function:
Block
EndFunc
Template for creating a user-defined
function.
Block can be a single statement, a series
of statements separated with the “:”
character, or a series of statements on
separate lines. The function can use the Result of graphing g(x)
Return instruction to return a specific
result.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

Alphabetical Listing 77
G

gcd() Catalogue >

gcd(Number1, Number2)⇒expression
Returns the highest common factor of
the two arguments. The gcd of two
fractions is the gcd of their numerators
divided by the lcm of their
denominators.
In Auto or Approximate mode, the gcd of
fractional floating-point numbers is 1.0.
gcd(List1, List2)⇒list
Returns the highest common factors of
the corresponding elements in List1 and
List2.
gcd(Matrix1, Matrix2)⇒matrix
Returns the highest common factors of
the corresponding elements in
Matrix1 and Matrix2.

geomCdf() Catalogue >

geomCdf(p,lowBound,upBound)⇒number if
lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if
lowBound and upBound are lists
geomCdf(p,upBound)for P(1{X{upBound)⇒number
if upBound is a number, list if upBound is a list
Computes a cumulative geometric probability from
lowBound to upBound with the specified probability
of success p.
For P(X { upBound), set lowBound = 1.

geomPdf() Catalogue >

geomPdf(p,XVal)⇒number if XVal is a number, list
if XVal is a list
Computes a probability at XVal, the number of the
trial on which the first success occurs, for the discrete
geometric distribution with the specified probability
of success p.

78 Alphabetical Listing
Get Hub Menu
Get[promptString,]var[, statusVar] Example: Request the current value of the
hub's built-in light-level sensor. Use Get to
Get[promptString,] func(arg1, ...argn) retrieve the value and assign it to variable
[, statusVar] lightval.
Programming command: Retrieves a
value from a connected TI-
Innovator™ Hub and assigns the value to
variable var.
The value must be requested:
Embed the READ request within the Get
• In advance, through a
command.
Send "READ ..." command.
— or —
• By embedding a "READ ..." request
as the optional promptString
argument. This method lets you use
a single command to request the
value and retrieve it.
Implicit simplification takes place. For
example, a received string of "123" is
interpreted as a numeric value. To
preserve the string, use GetStr instead of
Get.
If you include the optional argument
statusVar, it is assigned a value based on
the success of the operation. A value of
zero means that no data was received.
In the second syntax, the func()
argument allows a programme to store
the received string as a function
definition. This syntax operates as if the
programme executed the command:
Define func(arg1, ...argn) = received
string
The programme can then use the
defined function func().
Note: You can use the Get command
within a user-defined programme but
not within a function.

Alphabetical Listing 79
 Get Hub Menu
Note: See also GetStr, page 85 and Send,
page 160.

getDenom() Catalogue >

getDenom(Expr1)⇒expression
Transforms the argument into an
expression having a reduced common
denominator, and then returns its
denominator.

getKey() Catalogue >

getKey([0|1]) ⇒ returnString
Description:getKey() - allows a TI- Example:
Basic programme to get keyboard
input - handheld, desktop and
emulator on desktop.
Example:
• keypressed := getKey() will return a
key or an empty string if no key has
been pressed. This call will return
immediately.
• keypressed := getKey(1) will wait
till a key is pressed. This call will
pause execution of the programme
till a key is pressed.

Handling of key presses:

Handheld Device/Emulator
Desktop Return Value
Key
Esc Esc "esc"
Touchpad - Top click n/a "up"
On n/a "home"

Scratchapps n/a "scratchpad"

80 Alphabetical Listing
 Handheld Device/Emulator
Desktop Return Value
Key
Touchpad - Left click n/a "left"
Touchpad - Centre click n/a "centre"
Touchpad - Right click n/a "right"
Doc n/a "doc"

Tab Tab "tab"

Touchpad - Bottom click Down Arrow "down"
Menu n/a "menu"

Ctrl Ctrl no return

Shift Shift no return
Var n/a "var"
Del n/a "del"

= = "="
trig n/a "trig"
0 to 9 0-9 "0" ... "9"
Templates n/a "template"
Catalogue n/a "cat"

^ ^ "^"
X^2 n/a "square"
/ (division key) / "/"
* (multiply key) * "*"
e^x n/a "exp"
10^x n/a "10power"
+ + "+"
- - "-"

( ( "("
) ) ")"
. . "."

Alphabetical Listing 81
 Handheld Device/Emulator
Desktop Return Value
Key
(-) n/a "-" (negate sign)
Enter Enter "enter"

ee n/a "E" (scientific notation E)

a-z a-z alpha = letter pressed (lower
case)
("a" - "z")
shift a-z shift a-z alpha = letter pressed
"A" - "Z"
Note: ctrl-shift works to lock
caps
?! n/a "?!"

pi n/a "pi"
Flag n/a no return

, , ","
Return n/a "return"
Space Space " " (space)

Inaccessible Special Character Keys like The character is returned

@,!,^, etc.
n/a Function Keys No returned character
n/a Special desktop control keys No returned character
Inaccessible Other desktop keys that are Same character you get in
not available on the Notes (not in a maths box)
calculator while getkey() is
waiting for a keystroke. ({,
},;, :, ...)
Note: It is important to note that the presence of getKey() in a programme changes how
certain events are handled by the system. Some of these are described below.
Terminate programme and Handle event - Exactly as if the user were to break out of
programme by pressing the ON key
"Support" below means - System works as expected - programme continues to run.

82 Alphabetical Listing
Event Device Desktop - TI-Nspire™
Student Software
Quick Poll Terminate programme, Same as the handheld (TI-
handle event Nspire™ Student Software,
TI-Nspire™ Navigator™ NC
Teacher Software-only)
Remote file mgmt Terminate programme, Same as the handheld.
handle event (TI-Nspire™ Student
(Incl. sending 'Exit Press 2 Software, TI-Nspire™
Test' file from another Navigator™ NC Teacher
handheld or desktop- Software-only)
handheld)
End Class Terminate programme, Support
handle event (TI-Nspire™ Student
Software, TI-Nspire™
Navigator™ NC Teacher
Software-only)

Event Device Desktop - TI-Nspire™ All

Versions
TI-Innovator™ Hub Support - Can successfully Same as the handheld
connect/disconnect issue commands to the TI-
Innovator™ Hub. After you
exit the programme the TI-
Innovator™ Hub is still
working with the
handheld.

getLangInfo() Catalogue >

getLangInfo()⇒string
Returns a string that corresponds to the
short name of the currently active
language. You can, for example, use it in
a programme or function to determine
the current language.

Alphabetical Listing 83
 getLangInfo() Catalogue >
English = “en”
Danish = “da”
German = “de”
Finnish = “fi”
French = “fr”
Italian = “it”
Dutch = “nl”
Belgian Dutch = “nl_BE”
Norwegian = “no”
Portuguese = “pt”
Spanish = “es”
Swedish = “sv”

getLockInfo() Catalogue >

getLockInfo(Var)⇒value
Returns the current locked/unlocked
state of variable Var.
value =0: Var is unlocked or does not
exist.
value =1: Var is locked and cannot be
modified or deleted.
See Lock, page 107, and unLock, page
200.

getMode() Catalog >

getMode(ModeNameInteger)⇒value
getMode(0)⇒list
getMode(ModeNameInteger) returns a
value representing the current setting of
the ModeNameInteger mode.
getMode(0) returns a list containing
number pairs. Each pair consists of a
mode integer and a setting integer.
For a listing of the modes and their
settings, refer to the table below.

84 Alphabetical Listing
getMode() Catalog >
If you save the settings with getMode(0)
& var, you can use setMode(var) in a
function or programme to temporarily
restore the settings within the execution
of the function or programme only. See
setMode(), page 163.

Mode Name Mode Setting Integers

Integer
Display Digits 1 1=Float, 2=Float1, 3=Float2, 4=Float3, 5=Float4,
6=Float5, 7=Float6, 8=Float7, 9=Float8, 10=Float9,
11=Float10, 12=Float11, 13=Float12, 14=Fix0, 15=Fix1,
16=Fix2, 17=Fix3, 18=Fix4, 19=Fix5, 20=Fix6, 21=Fix7,
22=Fix8, 23=Fix9, 24=Fix10, 25=Fix11, 26=Fix12
Angle 2 1=Radian, 2=Degree, 3=Gradian
Exponential 3 1=Normal, 2=Scientific, 3=Engineering
Format
Real or 4 1=Real, 2=Rectangular, 3=Polar
Complex
Auto or 5 1=Auto, 2=Approximate, 3=Exact
Approx.
Vector Format 6 1=Rectangular, 2=Cylindrical, 3=Spherical
Base 7 1=Decimal, 2=Hex, 3=Binary
Unit system 8 1=SI, 2=Eng/US

getNum() Catalogue >

getNum(Expr1)⇒expression
Transforms the argument into an
expression having a reduced common
denominator, and then returns its
numerator.

GetStr Hub Menu

GetStr[promptString,] var[, statusVar] For examples, see Get.

GetStr[promptString,] func(arg1, ...argn)

[, statusVar]

Alphabetical Listing 85
 GetStr Hub Menu
Programming command: Operates identically to the
Get command, except that the retrieved value is
always interpreted as a string. By contrast, the Get
command interprets the response as an expression
unless it is enclosed in quotation marks ("").
Note: See also Get, page 79 and Send, page 160.

getType() Catalogue >

getType(var)⇒string
Returns a string that indicates the data
type of variable var.
If var has not been defined, returns the
string "NONE".

getVarInfo() Catalogue >

getVarInfo()⇒matrix or string
getVarInfo(LibNameString)⇒matrix or
string
getVarInfo() returns a matrix of
information (variable name, type, library
accessibility and locked/unlocked state)
for all variables and library objects
defined in the current problem.
If no variables are defined, getVarInfo()
returns the string "NONE".
getVarInfo(LibNameString)returns a
matrix of information for all library
objects defined in library
LibNameString. LibNameString must
be a string (text enclosed in quotation
marks) or a string variable.
If the library LibNameString does not
exist, an error occurs.

86 Alphabetical Listing
getVarInfo() Catalogue >
Note the example to the left, in which
the result of getVarInfo() is assigned to
variable vs. Attempting to display row 2
or row 3 of vs returns an “Invalid list or
matrix” error because at least one of
elements in those rows (variable b, for
example) revaluates to a matrix.
This error could also occur when using
Ans to reevaluate a getVarInfo() result.
The system gives the above error
because the current version of the
software does not support a generalised
matrix structure where an element of a
matrix can be either a matrix or a list.

Goto Catalogue >

Goto labelName
Transfers control to the label
labelName.
labelName must be defined in the same
function using a Lbl instruction.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

4Grad Catalogue >

Expr1 4 Grad⇒expression In Degree angle mode:

Converts Expr1 to gradian angle

measure.
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing In Radian angle mode:
@>Grad.

Alphabetical Listing 87
I

identity() Catalogue >

identity(Integer) ⇒ matrix
Returns the identity matrix with a
dimension of Integer.
Integer must be a positive integer.

If Catalogue >
If BooleanExpr
Statement
If BooleanExpr Then
Block
EndIf
If BooleanExpr evaluates to true,
executes the single statement Statement
or the block of statements Block before
continuing execution.
If BooleanExpr evaluates to false,
continues execution without executing
the statement or block of statements.
Block can be either a single statement or
a sequence of statements separated
with the “:” character.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.
If BooleanExpr Then
Block1
Else
Block2
EndIf
If BooleanExpr evaluates to true,
executes Block1 and then skips Block2.
If BooleanExpr evaluates to false, skips
Block1 but executes Block2.

88 Alphabetical Listing
If Catalogue >
Block1 and Block2 can be a single
statement.
If BooleanExpr1 Then
Block1
ElseIf BooleanExpr2 Then
Block2
⋮
ElseIf BooleanExprN Then
BlockN
EndIf
Allows for branching. If BooleanExpr1
evaluates to true, executes Block1. If
BooleanExpr1 evaluates to false,
evaluates BooleanExpr2, and so on.

ifFn() Catalogue >

ifFn(BooleanExpr,Value_If_true
[,Value_If_false [,Value_If_unknown]])
⇒ expression, list, or matrix
Evaluates the boolean expression Test value of 1 is less than 2.5, so its
BooleanExpr (or each element from corresponding
BooleanExpr ) and produces a result Value_If_True element of 5 is copied to the
based on the following rules: result list.
• BooleanExpr can test a single value, a
list, or a matrix.
• If an element of BooleanExpr Test value of 2 is less than 2.5, so its
evaluates to true, returns the corresponding
corresponding element from Value_ Value_If_True element of 6 is copied to the
If_true. result list.
• If an element of BooleanExpr
evaluates to false, returns the
corresponding element from Value_ Test value of 3 is not less than 2.5, so its
If_false. If you omit Value_If_false, corresponding Value_If_False element of 10
returns undef. is copied to the result list.

• If an element of BooleanExpr is
neither true nor false, returns the
corresponding element Value_If_
unknown. If you omit Value_If_
Value_If_true is a single value and
unknown, returns undef.
corresponds to any selected position.
• If the second, third, or fourth
argument of the ifFn() function is a

Alphabetical Listing 89
 ifFn() Catalogue >
single expression, the Boolean test is
applied to every position in
BooleanExpr. Value_If_false is not specified. Undef is used.
Note: If the simplified BooleanExpr
statement involves a list or matrix, all
other list or matrix arguments must have
the same dimension(s), and the result
will have the same dimension(s).
One element selected from Value_If_true.
One element selected from Value_If_
unknown.

imag() Catalogue >

imag(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Returns the imaginary part of the
argument.
Note: All undefined variables are treated
as real variables. See also real(), page
147
imag(List1) ⇒ list
Returns a list of the imaginary parts of
the elements.
imag(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix of the imaginary parts
of the elements.

impDif() Catalogue >

impDif(Equation, Var, dependVar
[,Ord]) ⇒ expression
where the order Ord defaults to 1.
Computes the implicit derivative for
equations in which one variable is
defined implicitly in terms of another.

Indirection See #(), page 230.

90 Alphabetical Listing
inString() Catalogue >
inString(srcString, subString[, Start]) ⇒
integer
Returns the character position in string
srcString at which the first occurrence
of string subString begins.
Start, if included, specifies the character
position within srcString where the
search begins. Default = 1 (the first
character of srcString).
If srcString does not contain subString
or Start is > the length of srcString,
returns zero.

int() Catalogue >

int(Expr) ⇒ integer

int(List1) ⇒ list
int(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns the greatest integer that is less
than or equal to the argument. This
function is identical to floor().
The argument can be a real or a complex
number.
For a list or matrix, returns the greatest
integer of each of the elements.

intDiv() Catalogue >

intDiv(Number1, Number2) ⇒ integer
intDiv(List1, List2) ⇒ list
intDiv(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix
Returns the signed integer part of
(Number1 ÷ Number2).
For lists and matrices, returns the signed
integer part of
(argument 1 ÷ argument 2) for each
element pair.

Alphabetical Listing 91
 integral See ∫(), page 225.

interpolate () Catalogue >

interpolate(xValue, xList, yList, Differential equation:
yPrimeList) ⇒ list y'=-3•y+6•t+5 and y(0)=5

This function does the following:

Given xList, yList=f(xList), and
yPrimeList=f'(xList) for some unknown
function f, a cubic interpolant is used to To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
approximate the function f at xValue. It 7 and 8 to move the cursor.
is assumed that xList is a list of
monotonically increasing or decreasing Use the interpolate() function to calculate the
numbers, but this function may return a function values for the xvaluelist:
value even when it is not. This function
walks through xList looking for an
interval [xList[i], xList[i+1]] that contains
xValue. If it finds such an interval, it
returns an interpolated value for f
(xValue); otherwise, it returns undef.
xList, yList, and yPrimeList must be of
equal dimension ≥ 2 and contain
expressions that simplify to numbers.
xValue can be an undefined variable, a
number, or a list of numbers.

invχ2() Catalogue >

invχ2(Area,df)

invChi2(Area,df)
Computes the Inverse cumulative χ2 (chi-square)
probability function specified by degree of freedom,
df for a given Area under the curve.

invF() Catalogue >

invF(Area,dfNumer,dfDenom)
invF(Area,dfNumer,dfDenom)

92 Alphabetical Listing
invF() Catalogue >
computes the Inverse cumulative F distribution
function specified by dfNumer and dfDenom for a
given Area under the curve.

invBinom() Catalogue >

invBinom Example: Mary and Kevin are playing a dice
(CumulativeProb,NumTrials,Prob, game. Mary has to guess the maximum
OutputForm)⇒ scalar or matrix number of times 6 shows up in 30 rolls. If the
number 6 shows up that many times or less,
Given the number of trials (NumTrials) Mary wins. Furthermore, the smaller the
and the probability of success of each number that she guesses, the greater her
trial (Prob), this function returns the winnings. What is the smallest number Mary
minimum number of successes, k, such can guess if she wants the probability of
that the cumulative probability of k winning to be greater than 77%?
successes is greater than or equal to the
given cumulative probability
(CumulativeProb).
OutputForm=0, displays result as a
scalar (default).
OutputForm=1, displays result as a
matrix.

invBinomN() Catalogue >

invBinomN(CumulativeProb,Prob, Example: Monique is practising goal shots for
NumSuccess,OutputForm)⇒ scalar or netball. She knows from experience that her
matrix chance of making any one shot is 70%. She
plans to practise until she scores 50 goals.
Given the probability of success of each How many shots must she attempt to ensure
trial (Prob), and the number of that the probability of making at least 50
successes (NumSuccess), this function goals is more than 0.99?
returns the minimum number of trials,
N, such that the cumulative probability
of x successes is less than or equal to the
given cumulative probability
(CumulativeProb).
OutputForm=0, displays result as a
scalar (default).
OutputForm=1, displays result as a
matrix.

Alphabetical Listing 93
 invNorm() Catalogue >
invNorm(Area[,μ[,σ]])
Computes the inverse cumulative normal distribution
function for a given Area under the normal
distribution curve specified by μ and σ.

invt() Catalogue >

invt(Area,df)
Computes the inverse cumulative student-t
probability function specified by degree of freedom,
df for a given Area under the curve.

iPart() Catalogue >

iPart(Number) ⇒ integer
iPart(List1) ⇒ list
iPart(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns the integer part of the
argument.
For lists and matrices, returns the
integer part of each element.
The argument can be a real or a complex
number.

irr() Catalogue >

irr(CF0,CFList [,CFFreq]) ⇒ value
Financial function that calculates internal
rate of return of an investment.
CF0 is the initial cash flow at time 0; it
must be a real number.
CFList is a list of cash flow amounts
after the initial cash flow CF0.
CFFreq is an optional list in which each
element specifies the frequency of
occurrence for a grouped (consecutive)
cash flow amount, which is the
corresponding element of CFList. The
default is 1; if you enter values, they
must be positive integers < 10,000.

94 Alphabetical Listing
irr() Catalogue >
Note: See also mirr(), page 116.

isPrime() Catalogue >

isPrime(Number) ⇒ Boolean constant
expression
Returns true or false to indicate if
number is a whole number ≥ 2 that is
evenly divisible only by itself and 1. Function to find the next prime after a
specified number:
If Number exceeds about 306 digits and
has no factors ≤1021, isPrime(Number)
displays an error message.
If you merely want to determine if
Number is prime, use isPrime() instead of
factor(). It is much faster, particularly if
Number is not prime and has a second-
largest factor that exceeds about five
digits.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

isVoid() Catalogue >

isVoid(Var) ⇒ Boolean constant
expression
isVoid(Expr) ⇒ Boolean constant
expression
isVoid(List) ⇒ list of Boolean constant
expressions
Returns true or false to indicate if the
argument is a void data type.
For more information on void elements,
see page 255.

Alphabetical Listing 95
L

Lbl Catalogue >

Lbl labelName
Defines a label with the name
labelName within a function.
You can use a Goto labelName
instruction to transfer control to the
instruction immediately following the
label.
labelName must meet the same naming
requirements as a variable name.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

lcm() Catalogue >

lcm(Number1, Number2)⇒expression
lcm(List1, List2)⇒list
lcm(Matrix1, Matrix2)⇒matrix
Returns the least common multiple of
the two arguments. The lcm of two
fractions is the lcm of their numerators
divided by the gcd of their denominators.
The lcm of fractional floating-point
numbers is their product.
For two lists or matrices, returns the
least common multiples of the
corresponding elements.

left() Catalogue >

left(sourceString[, Num])⇒string
Returns the leftmost Num characters
contained in character string
sourceString.

96 Alphabetical Listing
left() Catalogue >
If you omit Num, returns all of
sourceString.
left(List1[, Num])⇒list
Returns the leftmost Num elements
contained in List1.
If you omit Num, returns all of List1.
left(Comparison)⇒expression
Returns the left-hand side of an equation
or inequality.

libShortcut() Catalogue >

libShortcut(LibNameString, This example assumes a properly stored and
ShortcutNameString [, refreshed library document named linalg2
LibPrivFlag])⇒list of variables that contains objects defined as clearmat,
gauss1 and gauss2.
Creates a variable group in the current
problem that contains references to all
the objects in the specified library
document libNameString. Also adds the
group members to the Variables menu.
You can then refer to each object using
its ShortcutNameString.
Set LibPrivFlag=0 to exclude private
library objects (default)
Set LibPrivFlag=1 to include private
library objects
To copy a variable group, see CopyVar,
page 29.
To delete a variable group, see DelVar,
page 49.

Alphabetical Listing 97
 limit() or lim() Catalogue >
limit(Expr1, Var, Point
[,Direction])⇒expression
limit(List1, Var, Point [,
Direction])⇒list
limit(Matrix1, Var, Point [,
Direction])⇒matrix
Returns the limit requested.
Note: See also Limit template, page 6.
Direction: negative=from left,
positive=from right, otherwise=both. (If
omitted, Direction defaults to both.)
Limits at positive ˆ and at negative ˆ
are always converted to one-sided limits
from the finite side.
Depending on the circumstances, limit()
returns itself or undef when it cannot
determine a unique limit. This does not
necessarily mean that a unique limit
does not exist. undef means that the
result is either an unknown number with
finite or infinite magnitude, or it is the
entire set of such numbers.
limit() uses methods such as L’Hopital’s
rule, so there are unique limits that it
cannot determine. If Expr1 contains
undefined variables other than Var, you
might have to constrain them to obtain a
more concise result.
Limits can be very sensitive to rounding
error. When possible, avoid the
Approximate setting of the Auto or
Approximate mode and approximate
numbers when computing limits.
Otherwise, limits that should be zero or
have infinite magnitude probably will
not, and limits that should have finite
non-zero magnitude might not.

LinRegBx Catalogue >

LinRegBx X,Y[,[Freq][,Category,Include]]

98 Alphabetical Listing
LinRegBx Catalogue >
Computes the linear regressiony = a+b·xon lists X
and Y with frequency Freq. A summary of results is
stored in the stat.results variable (page 178).
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers | 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: a+b·x

stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.r2 Coefficient of determination

stat.r Correlation coefficient

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

LinRegMx Catalogue >

LinRegMx X,Y[,[Freq][,Category,Include]]

Alphabetical Listing 99
 LinRegMx Catalogue >
Computes the linear regression y = m·x+b on lists X
and Y with frequency Freq. A summary of results is
stored in the stat.results variable (page 178).
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers | 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: y = m·x+b

stat.m, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.r2 Coefficient of determination

stat.r Correlation coefficient

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

LinRegtIntervals Catalogue >

LinRegtIntervals X,Y[,F[,0[,CLev]]]
For Slope. Computes a level C confidence interval for
the slope.

100 Alphabetical Listing

 LinRegtIntervals Catalogue >
LinRegtIntervals X,Y[,F[,1,Xval[,CLev]]]
For Response. Computes a predicted y-value, a level C
prediction interval for a single observation and a level
C confidence interval for the mean response.
A summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable (page 178).
All the lists must have equal dimension.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.
F is an optional list of frequency values. Each element
in F specifies the frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The default value
is 1. All elements must be integers | 0.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: a+b·x

stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.df Degrees of freedom

stat.r2 Coefficient of determination

stat.r Correlation coefficient

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

For Slope type only

Output variable Description

[stat.CLower, stat.CUpper] Confidence interval for the slope

stat.ME Confidence interval margin of error

stat.SESlope Standard error of slope

stat.s Standard error about the line

For Response type only

Output variable Description

[stat.CLower, stat.CUpper] Confidence interval for the mean response

Alphabetical Listing 101

Output variable Description
stat.ME Confidence interval margin of error

stat.SE Standard error of mean response

[stat.LowerPred, Prediction interval for a single observation

stat.UpperPred]

stat.MEPred Prediction interval margin of error

stat.SEPred Standard error for prediction

stat.y a + b·XVal

LinRegtTest Catalogue >

LinRegtTest X,Y[,Freq[,Hypoth]]
Computes a linear regression on the X and Y lists and
a t test on the value of slope b and the correlation
coefficient r for the equation y=a+bx. It tests the null
hypothesis H0:b=0 (equivalently, r=0) against one of
three alternative hypotheses.
All the lists must have equal dimension.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers | 0.
Hypoth is an optional value specifying one of three
alternative hypotheses against which the null
hypothesis (H0:b=r=0) will be tested.
For Ha: bƒ0 and rƒ0 (default), set Hypoth=0

For Ha: b<0 and r<0, set Hypoth<0

For Ha: b>0 and r>0, set Hypoth>0

A summary of results is stored in the stat.results

variable (page 178).
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

102 Alphabetical Listing

Output variable Description
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a + b·x

stat.t t-Statistic for significance test

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom

stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.s Standard error about the line

stat.SESlope Standard error of slope

stat.r2 Coefficient of determination

stat.r Correlation coefficient

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

linSolve() Catalogue >

linSolve( SystemOfLinearEqns, Var1,
Var2, ...)⇒list
linSolve(LinearEqn1 and LinearEqn2
and ..., Var1, Var2, ...)⇒list
linSolve({LinearEqn1, LinearEqn2, ...},
Var1, Var2, ...) ⇒list
linSolve(SystemOfLinearEqns, {Var1,
Var2, ...}) ⇒list
linSolve(LinearEqn1 and LinearEqn2
and ..., {Var1, Var2, ...})⇒list
linSolve({LinearEqn1, LinearEgn2, ...},
{Var1, Var2, ...}) ⇒list
Returns a list of solutions for the
variables Var1, Var2, ...
The first argument must evaluate to a
system of linear equations or a single
linear equation. Otherwise, an argument
error occurs.
For example, evaluating linSolve(x=1 and
x=2,x) produces an “Argument Error”
result.

Alphabetical Listing 103

 @List() Catalogue >
@List(List1)⇒list
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing deltaList
(...).
Returns a list containing the differences
between consecutive elements in List1.
Each element of List1 is subtracted from
the next element of List1. The resulting
list is always one element shorter than
the original List1.

list4mat() Catalogue >

list4mat(List [,
elementsPerRow])⇒matrix
Returns a matrix filled row-by-row with
the elements from List.
elementsPerRow, if included, specifies
the number of elements per row. Default
is the number of elements in List (one
row).
If List does not fill the resulting matrix,
zeroes are added.
Note: You can insert this function from
the computer keyboard by typing
list@>mat(...).

4ln Catalogue >

Expr 4ln⇒expression
Causes the input Expr to be converted
to an expression containing only natural
logs (ln).
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing @>ln.

ln() /u keys
ln(Expr1)⇒expression

104 Alphabetical Listing

ln() /u keys
ln(List1)⇒list
Returns the natural logarithm of the If complex format mode is Real:
argument.
For a list, returns the natural logarithms
of the elements.

If complex format mode is Rectangular:

ln(squareMatrix1)⇒squareMatrix In Radian angle mode and Rectangular

complex format:
Returns the matrix natural logarithm of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the natural logarithm of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() on.
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalisable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.
To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
7 and 8 to move the cursor.

LnReg Catalogue >

LnReg X, Y[, [Freq] [, Category, Include]]
Computes the logarithmic regression y = a+b·ln(x) on
lists X and Y with frequency Freq. A summary of
results is stored in the stat.results variable (page
178).
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers | 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.

Alphabetical Listing 105

 LnReg Catalogue >
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a+b·ln(x)

stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.r2 Coefficient of linear determination for transformed data

stat.r Correlation coefficient for transformed data (ln(x), y)

stat.Resid Residuals associated with the logarithmic model

stat.ResidTrans Residuals associated with linear fit of transformed data

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression
based on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression
based on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

Local Catalogue >

Local Var1[, Var2] [, Var3] ...
Declares the specified vars as local
variables. Those variables exist only
during evaluation of a function and are
deleted when the function finishes
execution.
Note: Local variables save memory
because they only exist temporarily.
Also, they do not disturb any existing
global variable values. Local variables
must be used for For loops and for
temporarily saving values in a multi-line
function since modifications on global
variables are not allowed in a function.

106 Alphabetical Listing

Local Catalogue >
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

Lock Catalogue >

LockVar1[, Var2] [, Var3] ...
LockVar.
Locks the specified variables or variable
group. Locked variables cannot be
modified or deleted.
You cannot lock or unlock the system
variable Ans, and you cannot lock the
system variable groups stat. or tvm.
Note: The Lock command clears the
Undo/Redo history when applied to
unlocked variables.
See unLock, page 200, andgetLockInfo(),
page 84.

log() /s keys
log(Expr1[,Expr2])⇒expression

log(List1[,Expr2])⇒list

Returns the base-Expr2 logarithm of the

first argument.
Note: See also Log template, page 2.
For a list, returns the base-Expr2 If complex format mode is Real:
logarithm of the elements.
If the second argument is omitted, 10 is
used as the base.

If complex format mode is Rectangular:

Alphabetical Listing 107

 log() /s keys

log(squareMatrix1 In Radian angle mode and Rectangular

[,Expr])⇒squareMatrix complex format:

Returns the matrix base-Expr logarithm

of squareMatrix1. This is not the same
as calculating the base-Expr logarithm of
each element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalisable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers. To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
7 and 8 to move the cursor.
If the base argument is omitted, 10 is
used as base.

4logbase Catalogue >

Expr 4logbase(Expr1)⇒expression
Causes the input Expression to be
simplified to an expression using base
Expr1.
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>logbase(...).

Logistic Catalogue >

Logistic X, Y[, [Freq] [, Category, Include]]
Computes the logistic regressiony = (c/(1+a·e-bx))on
lists X and Y with frequency Freq. A summary of
results is stored in the stat.results variable (page
178).
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.

108 Alphabetical Listing

Logistic Catalogue >
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers | 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: c/(1+a·e-bx)

stat.a, stat.b, Regression coefficients

stat.c

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

LogisticD Catalogue >

LogisticD X, Y [ , [Iterations] , [Freq] [, Category,
Include] ]
Computes the logistic regression y = (c/(1+a·e-bx)+d)
on lists X and Y with frequency Freq, using a
specified number of Iterations. A summary of results
is stored in the stat.results variable (page 178).
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.

Alphabetical Listing 109

 LogisticD Catalogue >
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers | 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: c/(1+a·e-bx)+d)

stat.a, stat.b, Regression coefficients

stat.c, stat.d

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

Loop Catalogue >

Loop
Block
EndLoop
Repeatedly executes the statements in
Block. Note that the loop will be
executed endlessly, unless a Goto or Exit
instruction is executed within Block.
Block is a sequence of statements
separated with the “:” character.

110 Alphabetical Listing

Loop Catalogue >
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

LU Catalogue >
LU Matrix, lMatrix, uMatrix, pMatrix
[,Tol]
Calculates the Doolittle LU (lower-upper)
decomposition of a real or complex
matrix. The lower triangular matrix is
stored in lMatrix, the upper triangular
matrix in uMatrix and the permutation
matrix (which describes the row swaps
done during the calculation) in pMatrix.
lMatrix · uMatrix = pMatrix · matrix
Optionally, any matrix element is treated
as zero if its absolute value is less than
Tol. This tolerance is used only if the
matrix has floating-point entries and
does not contain any symbolic variables
that have not been assigned a value.
Otherwise, Tol is ignored.

• If you use /· or set the Auto or

Approximate mode to Approximate,
computations are done using floating-
point arithmetic.
• If Tol is omitted or not used, the
default tolerance is calculated as:
5EM14 ·max(dim(Matrix)) ·rowNorm
(Matrix)
The LU factorization algorithm uses
partial pivoting with row interchanges.

Alphabetical Listing 111

M

mat4list() Catalogue >

mat4list(Matrix)⇒list
Returns a list filled with the elements in
Matrix. The elements are copied from
Matrix row by row.
Note: You can insert this function from
the computer keyboard by typing
mat@>list(...).

max() Catalogue >

max(Expr1, Expr2)⇒expression
max(List1, List2)⇒list

max(Matrix1, Matrix2)⇒matrix
Returns the maximum of the two
arguments. If the arguments are two lists
or matrices, returns a list or matrix
containing the maximum value of each
pair of corresponding elements.
max(List)⇒expression
Returns the maximum element in list.
max(Matrix1)⇒matrix
Returns a row vector containing the
maximum element of each column in
Matrix1.
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements,
see page 255.
Note: See also fMax() and min().

mean() Catalogue >

mean(List[, freqList])⇒expression
Returns the mean of the elements in
List.

112 Alphabetical Listing

mean() Catalogue >
Each freqList element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of
the corresponding element in List.
mean(Matrix1[, freqMatrix])⇒matrix In Rectangular vector format:

Returns a row vector of the means of all

the columns in Matrix1.
Each freqMatrix element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of
the corresponding element in Matrix1.
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements,
see page 255.

median() Catalogue >

median(List[, freqList])⇒expression
Returns the median of the elements in
List.
Each freqList element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of
the corresponding element in List.
median(Matrix1[, freqMatrix])⇒matrix
Returns a row vector containing the
medians of the columns in Matrix1.
Each freqMatrix element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of
the corresponding element in Matrix1.
Notes:
• All entries in the list or matrix must
simplify to numbers.
• Empty (void) elements in the list or
matrix are ignored. For more
information on empty elements, see
page 255.

Alphabetical Listing 113

 MedMed Catalogue >
MedMed X,Y [, Freq] [, Category, Include]]
Computes the median-median liney = (m·x+b)on lists
X and Y with frequency Freq. A summary of results is
stored in the stat.results variable (page 178).
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers | 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Median-median line equation: m·x+b

stat.m, stat.b Model coefficients

stat.Resid Residuals from the median-median line

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

mid() Catalogue >

mid(sourceString, Start[,
Count])⇒string

114 Alphabetical Listing

mid() Catalogue >
Returns Count characters from character
string sourceString, beginning with
character number Start.
If Count is omitted or is greater than the
dimension of sourceString, returns all
characters from sourceString, beginning
with character number Start.
Count must be | 0. If Count = 0, returns
an empty string.
mid(sourceList, Start [, Count])⇒list
Returns Count elements from
sourceList, beginning with element
number Start.
If Count is omitted or is greater than the
dimension of sourceList, returns all
elements from sourceList, beginning
with element number Start.
Count must be | 0. If Count = 0, returns
an empty list.
mid(sourceStringList, Start[,
Count])⇒list
Returns Count strings from the list of
strings sourceStringList, beginning with
element number Start.

min() Catalogue >

min(Expr1, Expr2)⇒expression
min(List1, List2)⇒list
min(Matrix1, Matrix2)⇒matrix
Returns the minimum of the two
arguments. If the arguments are two lists
or matrices, returns a list or matrix
containing the minimum value of each
pair of corresponding elements.
min(List)⇒expression
Returns the minimum element of List.

Alphabetical Listing 115

 min() Catalogue >
min(Matrix1)⇒matrix
Returns a row vector containing the
minimum element of each column in
Matrix1.
Note: See also fMin() and max().

mirr() Catalogue >

mirr
(financeRate,reinvestRate,CF0,CFList
[,CFFreq])
Financial function that returns the
modified internal rate of return of an
investment.
financeRate is the interest rate that you
pay on the cash flow amounts.
reinvestRate is the interest rate at which
the cash flows are reinvested.
CF0 is the initial cash flow at time 0; it
must be a real number.
CFList is a list of cash flow amounts
after the initial cash flow CF0.
CFFreq is an optional list in which each
element specifies the frequency of
occurrence for a grouped (consecutive)
cash flow amount, which is the
corresponding element of CFList. The
default is 1; if you enter values, they
must be positive integers < 10,000.
Note: See also irr(), page 94.

mod() Catalogue >

mod(Expr1, Expr2)⇒expression
mod(List1, List2)⇒list
mod(Matrix1, Matrix2)⇒matrix

116 Alphabetical Listing

mod() Catalogue >
Returns the first argument modulo the
second argument as defined by the
identities:
mod(x,0) = x
mod(x,y) = x - y floor(x/y)
When the second argument is non-zero,
the result is periodic in that argument.
The result is either zero or has the same
sign as the second argument.
If the arguments are two lists or two
matrices, returns a list or matrix
containing the modulo of each pair of
corresponding elements.
Note: See also remain(), page 150

mRow() Catalogue >

mRow(Expr, Matrix1, Index)⇒matrix
Returns a copy of Matrix1 with each
element in row Index of Matrix1
multiplied by Expr.

mRowAdd() Catalogue >

mRowAdd(Expr, Matrix1, Index1,
Index2) ⇒matrix
Returns a copy of Matrix1 with each
element in row Index2 of Matrix1
replaced with:
Expr · row Index1 + row Index2
Index2

MultReg Catalogue >

MultReg Y, X1[,X2[,X3,…[,X10]]]
Calculates multiple linear regression of list Y on lists
X1, X2, …, X10. A summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable (page 178).

Alphabetical Listing 117

 MultReg Catalogue >
All the lists must have equal dimension.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: b0+b1·x1+b2·x2+ ...

stat.b0, stat.b1, ... Regression coefficients

stat.R2 Coefficient of multiple determination

stat.yList yList = b0+b1·x1+ ...

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

MultRegIntervals Catalogue >

MultRegIntervals Y, X1[,X2[,X3,…[,X10]]],XValList
[,CLevel]
Computes a predicted y-value, a level C prediction
interval for a single observation, and a level C
confidence interval for the mean response.
A summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable (page 178).
All the lists must have equal dimension.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: b0+b1·x1+b2·x2+ ...

stat.y A point estimate: y = b0 + b1 · xl + ... for XValList

stat.dfError Error degrees of freedom

stat.CLower, stat.CUpper Confidence interval for a mean response

stat.ME Confidence interval margin of error

stat.SE Standard error of mean response

stat.LowerPred, Prediction interval for a single observation

stat.UpperrPred

stat.MEPred Prediction interval margin of error

118 Alphabetical Listing

Output variable Description
stat.SEPred Standard error for prediction

stat.bList List of regression coefficients, {b0,b1,b2,...}

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

MultRegTests Catalogue >

MultRegTests Y, X1[,X2[,X3,…[,X10]]]
Multiple linear regression test computes a multiple
linear regression on the given data and provides the
global F test statistic and t test statistics for the
coefficients.
A summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable (page 178).
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.
Outputs

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: b0+b1·x1+b2·x2+ ...

stat.F Global F test statistic

stat.PVal P-value associated with global F statistic

stat.R2 Coefficient of multiple determination

stat.AdjR2 Adjusted coefficient of multiple determination

stat.s Standard deviation of the error

stat.DW Durbin-Watson statistic; used to determine whether first-order auto

correlation is present in the model

stat.dfReg Regression degrees of freedom

stat.SSReg Regression sum of squares

stat.MSReg Regression mean square

stat.dfError Error degrees of freedom

stat.SSError Error sum of squares

stat.MSError Error mean square

Alphabetical Listing 119

Output
Description
variable
stat.bList {b0,b1,...} List of coefficients

stat.tList List of t statistics, one for each coefficient in the bList

stat.PList List P-values for each t statistic

stat.SEList List of standard errors for coefficients in bList

stat.yList yList = b0+b1·x1+ . . .

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.sResid Standardized residuals; obtained by dividing a residual by its standard

deviation

stat.CookDist Cook’s distance; measure of the influence of an observation based on the

residual and leverage

stat.Leverage Measure of how far the values of the independent variable are from their
mean values

nand /= keys
BooleanExpr1nandBooleanExpr2
returns Boolean expression
BooleanList1nandBooleanList2 returns
Boolean list
BooleanMatrix1nandBooleanMatrix2
returns Boolean matrix

Returns the negation of a logical and

operation on the two arguments.
Returns true, false, or a simplified form
of the equation.
For lists and matrices, returns
comparisons element by element.
Integer1nandInteger2⇒integer

120 Alphabetical Listing

nand /= keys
Compares two real integers bit-by-bit
using a nand operation. Internally, both
integers are converted to signed, 64-bit
binary numbers. When corresponding
bits are compared, the result is 0 if both
bits are 1; otherwise, the result is 1. The
returned value represents the bit results,
and is displayed according to the Base
mode.
You can enter the integers in any
number base. For a binary or
hexadecimal entry, you must use the 0b
or 0h prefix, respectively. Without a
prefix, integers are treated as decimal
(base 10).

nCr() Catalogue >

nCr(Expr1, Expr2)⇒expression
For integer Expr1 and Expr2 with Expr1
| Expr2 | 0, nCr() is the number of
combinations of Expr1 things taken
Expr2 at a time. (This is also known as a
binomial coefficient.) Both arguments
can be integers or symbolic expressions.

nCr(Expr, 0)⇒1
nCr(Expr, negInteger)⇒0
nCr(Expr, posInteger)⇒ Expr·
(ExprN1)...
(ExprNposInteger+1)/ posInteger!

nCr(Expr, nonInteger)⇒expression!/
((ExprNnonInteger)!·nonInteger!)
nCr(List1, List2)⇒list
Returns a list of combinations based on
the corresponding element pairs in the
two lists. The arguments must be the
same size list.
nCr(Matrix1, Matrix2)⇒matrix

Alphabetical Listing 121

 nCr() Catalogue >
Returns a matrix of combinations based
on the corresponding element pairs in
the two matrices. The arguments must
be the same size matrix.

nDerivative() Catalogue >

nDerivative(Expr1,Var=Value
[,Order])⇒value
nDerivative(Expr1,Var[,Order]) |
Var=Value⇒value
Returns the numerical derivative
calculated using auto differentiation
methods.
When Value is specified, it overrides any
prior variable assignment or any current
“|” substitution for the variable.
Order of the derivative must be 1 or 2.

newList() Catalogue >

newList(numElements)⇒list
Returns a list with a dimension of
numElements. Each element is zero.

newMat() Catalogue >

newMat(numRows,
numColumns)⇒matrix
Returns a matrix of zeroes with the
dimension numRows by numColumns.

nfMax() Catalogue >

nfMax(Expr, Var)⇒value
nfMax(Expr, Var, lowBound)⇒value
nfMax(Expr, Var, lowBound,
upBound)⇒value

122 Alphabetical Listing

nfMax() Catalogue >
nfMax(Expr, Var) | lowBound{Var
{upBound⇒value
Returns a candidate numerical value of
variable Var where the local maximum
of Expr occurs.
If you supply lowBound and upBound,
the function looks in the closed interval
[lowBound,upBound] for the local
maximum.
Note: See also fMax() and d().

nfMin() Catalogue >

nfMin(Expr, Var)⇒value
nfMin(Expr, Var, lowBound)⇒value
nfMin(Expr, Var, lowBound,
upBound)⇒value
nfMin(Expr, Var) | lowBound{Var
{upBound⇒value
Returns a candidate numerical value of
variable Var where the local minimum of
Expr occurs.
If you supply lowBound and upBound,
the function looks in the closed interval
[lowBound,upBound] for the local
minimum.
Note: See also fMin() and d().

nInt() Catalogue >

nInt(Expr1, Var, Lower,
Upper)⇒expression

Alphabetical Listing 123

 nInt() Catalogue >
If the integrand Expr1 contains no
variable other than Var, and if Lower
and Upper are constants, positive ˆ, or
negative ˆ, then nInt() returns an
approximation of ‰(Expr1, Var, Lower,
Upper). This approximation is a
weighted average of some sample values
of the integrand in the interval
Lower<Var<Upper.
The goal is six significant digits. The
adaptive algorithm terminates when it
seems likely that the goal has been
achieved, or when it seems unlikely that
additional samples will yield a
worthwhile improvement.
A warning is displayed (“Questionable
accuracy”) when it seems that the goal
has not been achieved.
Nest nInt() to do multiple numeric
integration. Integration limits can
depend on integration variables outside
them.
Note: See also ‰(), page 225.

nom() Catalogue >

nom(effectiveRate,CpY)⇒value
Financial function that converts the
annual effective interest rate
effectiveRate to a nominal rate, given
CpY as the number of compounding
periods per year.
effectiveRate must be a real number,
and CpY must be a real number > 0.
Note: See also eff(), page 59.

nor /= keys
BooleanExpr1norBooleanExpr2 returns
Boolean expression
BooleanList1norBooleanList2 returns
Boolean list

124 Alphabetical Listing

nor /= keys
BooleanMatrix1norBooleanMatrix2
returns Boolean matrix

Returns the negation of a logical or

operation on the two arguments.
Returns true, false, or a simplified form
of the equation.
For lists and matrices, returns
comparisons element by element.
Integer1norInteger2⇒integer
Compares two real integers bit-by-bit
using a nor operation. Internally, both
integers are converted to signed, 64-bit
binary numbers. When corresponding
bits are compared, the result is 1 if both
bits are 1; otherwise, the result is 0. The
returned value represents the bit results
and is displayed according to the Base
mode.
You can enter the integers in any
number base. For a binary or
hexadecimal entry, you must use the 0b
or 0h prefix, respectively. Without a
prefix, integers are treated as decimal
(base 10).

norm() Catalogue >

norm(Matrix)⇒expression
norm(Vector)⇒expression
Returns the Frobenius norm.

Alphabetical Listing 125

 normalLine() Catalogue >
normalLine
(Expr1,Var,Point)⇒expression
normalLine
(Expr1,Var=Point)⇒expression
Returns the normal line to the curve
represented by Expr1 at the point
specified in Var=Point.
Make sure that the independent variable
is not defined. For example, If f1(x):=5
and x:=3, then normalLine(f1(x),x,2)
returns “false.”

normCdf() Catalogue >

normCdf(lowBound,upBound[,m[,s]])⇒number if
lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if
lowBound and upBound are lists
Computes the normal distribution probability
between lowBound and upBound for the specified m
(default=0) and s (default=1).
For P(X {Å upBound), set lowBound = .ˆ.

normPdf() Catalogue >

normPdf(XVal[,m[,s]])⇒number if XVal is a number,
list if XVal is a list
Computes the probability density function for the
normal distribution at a specified XVal value for the
specified m and s.

not Catalogue >

not BooleanExpr⇒Boolean expression
Returns true, false, or a simplified form
of the argument.
not Integer1⇒integer In Hex base mode:

Important: Zero, not the letter O.

126 Alphabetical Listing

not Catalogue >
Returns the one’s complement of a real
integer. Internally, Integer1 is converted
to a signed, 64-bit binary number. The
value of each bit is flipped (0 becomes 1
and vice versa) for the one’s
complement. Results are displayed In Bin base mode:
according to the Base mode.
You can enter the integer in any number
base. For a binary or hexadecimal entry,
you must use the 0b or 0h prefix,
respectively. Without a prefix, the
integer is treated as decimal (base 10).
To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
If you enter a decimal integer that is too
7 and 8 to move the cursor.
large for a signed, 64-bit binary form, a
symmetric modulo operation is used to Note: A binary entry can have up to 64 digits
bring the value into the appropriate (not counting the 0b prefix). A hexadecimal
range. For more information, see 4Base2, entry can have up to 16 digits.
page 17.

nPr() Catalogue >

nPr(Expr1, Expr2)⇒expression
For integer Expr1 and Expr2 with Expr1
| Expr2 | 0, nPr() is the number of
permutations of Expr1 things taken
Expr2 at a time. Both arguments can be
integers or symbolic expressions.

nPr(Expr, 0)⇒1
nPr(Expr, negInteger)⇒ 1/((Expr+1)·
(Expr+2)...
(expressionNnegInteger))

nPr(Expr, posInteger)⇒ Expr·

(ExprN1)...
(ExprNposInteger+1)

nPr(Expr, nonInteger)⇒Expr! /
(ExprNnonInteger)!
nPr(List1, List2)⇒list

Alphabetical Listing 127

 nPr() Catalogue >
Returns a list of permutations based on
the corresponding element pairs in the
two lists. The arguments must be the
same size list.
nPr(Matrix1, Matrix2)⇒matrix
Returns a matrix of permutations based
on the corresponding element pairs in
the two matrices. The arguments must
be the same size matrix.

npv() Catalogue >

npv(InterestRate,CFO,CFList
[,CFFreq])
Financial function that calculates net
present value; the sum of the present
values for the cash inflows and outflows.
A positive result for npv indicates a
profitable investment.
InterestRate is the rate by which to
discount the cash flows (the cost of
money) over one period.
CF0 is the initial cash flow at time 0; it
must be a real number.
CFList is a list of cash flow amounts
after the initial cash flow CF0.
CFFreq is a list in which each element
specifies the frequency of occurrence for
a grouped (consecutive) cash flow
amount, which is the corresponding
element of CFList. The default is 1; if
you enter values, they must be positive
integers < 10,000.

nSolve() Catalogue >

nSolve(Equation,Var
[=Guess])⇒number or error_string
nSolve(Equation,Var
[=Guess],lowBound) ⇒number or
error_string

128 Alphabetical Listing

nSolve() Catalogue >
nSolve(Equation,Var Note: If there are multiple solutions, you can
[=Guess],lowBound,upBound) use a guess to help find a particular solution.
⇒number or error_string
nSolve(Equation,Var[=Guess]) |
lowBound{Var{upBound ⇒number or
error_string
Iteratively searches for one approximate
real numeric solution to Equation for its
one variable. Specify the variable as:
variable
– or –
variable = real number
For example, x is valid and so is x=3.
nSolve() is often much faster than solve()
or zeroes(), particularly if the “|”
operator is used to constrain the search
to a small interval containing exactly one
simple solution.
nSolve() attempts to determine either
one point where the residual is zero or
two relatively close points where the
residual has opposite signs and the
magnitude of the residual is not
excessive. If it cannot achieve this using
a modest number of sample points, it
returns the string “no solution found.”
Note: See also cSolve(), cZeroes(), solve()
and zeroes().

OneVar Catalogue >

OneVar [1,]X[,[Freq][,Category,Include]]
OneVar [n,]X1,X2[X3[,…[,X20]]]
Calculates 1-variable statistics on up to 20 lists. A
summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable (page 178).
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.

Alphabetical Listing 129

 OneVar Catalogue >
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers | 0.
Category is a list of numeric category codes for the
corresponding X values.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
An empty (void) element in any of the lists X, Freq or
Category results in a void for the corresponding
element of all those lists. An empty element in any of
the lists X1 through X20 results in a void for the
corresponding element of all those lists. For more
information on empty elements, see page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.v Mean of x values

stat.Gx Sum of x values

stat.Gx2 Sum of x2 values

stat.sx Sample standard deviation of x

stat.sx Population standard deviation of x

stat.n Number of data points

stat.MinX Minimum of x values

stat.Q1X 1st Quartile of x

stat.MedianX Median of x

stat.Q3X 3rd Quartile of x

stat.MaxX Maximum of x values

stat.SSX Sum of squares of deviations from the mean of x

or Catalogue >
BooleanExpr1orBooleanExpr2 returns
Boolean expression
BooleanList1orBooleanList2 returns
Boolean list

130 Alphabetical Listing

or Catalogue >
BooleanMatrix1orBooleanMatrix2
returns Boolean matrix
Returns true or false or a simplified form
of the original entry.
Returns true if either or both expressions
simplify to true. Returns false only if
both expressions evaluate to false.
Note: See xor.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.
Integer1 or Integer2⇒integer In Hex base mode:

Compares two real integers bit-by-bit

using an or operation. Internally, both
integers are converted to signed, 64-bit Important: Zero, not the letter O.
binary numbers. When corresponding
bits are compared, the result is 1 if
either bit is 1; the result is 0 only if both In Bin base mode:
bits are 0. The returned value represents
the bit results and is displayed according
to the Base mode.
Note: A binary entry can have up to 64 digits
You can enter the integers in any (not counting the 0b prefix). A hexadecimal
number base. For a binary or entry can have up to 16 digits.
hexadecimal entry, you must use the 0b
or 0h prefix, respectively. Without a
prefix, integers are treated as decimal
(base 10).
If you enter a decimal integer that is too
large for a signed, 64-bit binary form, a
symmetric modulo operation is used to
bring the value into the appropriate
range. For more information, see 4Base2,
page 17.
Note: See xor.

Alphabetical Listing 131

 ord() Catalogue >
ord(String)⇒integer
ord(List1)⇒list
Returns the numeric code of the first
character in character string String, or a
list of the first characters of each list
element.

P4Rx() Catalogue >

P4Rx(rExpr, qExpr)⇒expression In Radian angle mode:

P4Rx(rList, qList)⇒list
P4Rx(rMatrix, qMatrix)⇒matrix
Returns the equivalent x-coordinate of
the (r, q) pair.
Note: The q argument is interpreted as
either a degree, gradian or radian angle,
according to the current angle mode. If
the argument is an expression, you can
use ¡, G or R to override the angle mode
setting temporarily.
Note: You can insert this function from
the computer keyboard by typing P@>Rx
(...).

P4Ry() Catalogue >

P4Ry(rExpr, qExpr)⇒expression In Radian angle mode:

P4Ry(rList, qList)⇒list
P4Ry(rMatrix, qMatrix)⇒matrix
Returns the equivalent y-coordinate of
the (r, q) pair.
Note: The q argument is interpreted as
either a degree, radian or gradian angle,
according to the current angle mode. If
the argument is an expression, you can
use ¡, G or R to override the angle mode
setting temporarily.

132 Alphabetical Listing

P4Ry() Catalogue >
Note: You can insert this function from
the computer keyboard by typing P@>Ry
(...).

PassErr Catalogue >

PassErr For an example of PassErr, See
Example 2 under the Try
Passes an error to the next level. command, page 193.
If system variable errCode is zero, PassErr does not
do anything.
The Else clause of the Try...Else...EndTry block should
use ClrErr or PassErr. If the error is to be processed or
ignored, use ClrErr. If what to do with the error is not
known, use PassErr to send it to the next error
handler. If there are no more pending
Try...Else...EndTry error handlers, the error dialogue
box will be displayed as normal.
Note: See also ClrErr, page 25, and Try, page 193.
Note for entering the example: For instructions on
entering multi-line programme and function
definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

piecewise() Catalogue >

piecewise(Expr1 [, Cond1 [, Expr2 [,
Cond2 [, … ]]]])
Returns definitions for a piecewise
function in the form of a list. You can
also create piecewise definitions by
using a template.
Note: See also Piecewise template, page
2.

poissCdf() Catalogue >

poissCdf(l,lowBound,upBound)⇒number if
lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if
lowBound and upBound are lists
poissCdf(l,upBound)for P(0{X{upBound)⇒number

Alphabetical Listing 133

 poissCdf() Catalogue >
if upBound is a number, list if upBound is a list
Computes a cumulative probability for the discrete
Poisson distribution with specified mean l.
For P(X { upBound), set lowBound=0

poissPdf() Catalogue >

poissPdf(l,XVal)⇒number if XVal is a number, list if
XVal is a list
Computes a probability for the discrete Poisson
distribution with the specified mean l.

4Polar Catalogue >

Vector 4Polar
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>Polar.
Displays vector in polar form [r ±q]. The
vector must be of dimension 2 and can
be a row or a column.
Note: 4Polar is a display-format
instruction, not a conversion function.
You can use it only at the end of an entry
line, and it does not update ans.
Note: See also 4Rect, page 147.
complexValue 4Polar In Radian angle mode:

Displays complexVector in polar form.

• Degree angle mode returns (r±q).
• Radian angle mode returns reiq.

complexValue can have any complex

form. However, an reiq entry causes an
error in Degree angle mode.
In Gradian angle mode:
Note: You must use the parentheses for
an (r±q) polar entry.

In Degree angle mode:

134 Alphabetical Listing

4Polar Catalogue >

polyCoeffs() Catalogue >

polyCoeffs(Poly [,Var])⇒list
Returns a list of the coefficients of
polynomial Poly with respect to variable
Var.
Poly must be a polynomial expression in
Var. We recommend that you do not
omit Var unless Poly is an expression in Expands the polynomial and selects x for the
a single variable. omitted Var.

polyDegree() Catalogue >

polyDegree(Poly [,Var])⇒value
Returns the degree of polynomial
expression Poly with respect to variable
Var. If you omit Var, the polyDegree() Constant polynomials
function selects a default from the
variables contained in the polynomial
Poly.
Poly must be a polynomial expression in
Var. We recommend that you do not
omit Var unless Poly is an expression in
a single variable.

Alphabetical Listing 135

 polyDegree() Catalogue >

The degree can be extracted even though the

coefficients cannot. This is because the
degree can be extracted without expanding
the polynomial.

polyEval() Catalogue >

polyEval(List1, Expr1)⇒expression
polyEval(List1, List2)⇒expression
Interprets the first argument as the
coefficient of a descending-degree
polynomial and returns the polynomial
evaluated for the value of the second
argument.

polyGcd() Catalogue >

polyGcd(Expr1,Expr2)⇒expression
Returns highest common factor of the
two arguments.
Expr1 and Expr2 must be polynomial
expressions.
List, matrix and Boolean arguments are
not allowed.

polyQuotient() Catalogue >

polyQuotient(Poly1,Poly2
[,Var])⇒expression
Returns the quotient of polynomial
Poly1 divided by polynomial Poly2 with
respect to the specified variable Var.
Poly1 and Poly2 must be polynomial
expressions in Var. We recommend that
you do not omit Var unless Poly1 and
Poly2 are expressions in the same single
variable.

136 Alphabetical Listing

polyQuotient() Catalogue >

polyRemainder() Catalogue >

polyRemainder(Poly1,Poly2
[,Var])⇒expression
Returns the remainder of polynomial
Poly1 divided by polynomial Poly2 with
respect to the specified variable Var.
Poly1 and Poly2 must be polynomial
expressions in Var. We recommend that
you do not omit Var unless Poly1 and
Poly2 are expressions in the same single
variable.

polyRoots() Catalogue >

polyRoots(Poly,Var) ⇒list
polyRoots(ListOfCoeffs) ⇒list
The first syntax, polyRoots(Poly,Var),
returns a list of real roots of polynomial
Poly with respect to variable Var. If no
real roots exist, returns an empty list: { }.
Poly must be a polynomial in one
variable.
The second syntax, polyRoots
(ListOfCoeffs), returns a list of real roots
for the coefficients in ListOfCoeffs.
Note: See also cPolyRoots(), page 36.

Alphabetical Listing 137

 PowerReg Catalogue >
PowerReg X,Y [, Freq] [, Category, Include]]
Computes the power regressiony = (a·(x)b)on lists X
and Y with frequency Freq. A summary of results is
stored in the stat.results variable (page 178).
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers | 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a·(x)b

stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.r2 Coefficient of linear determination for transformed data

stat.r Correlation coefficient for transformed data (ln(x), ln(y))

stat.Resid Residuals associated with the power model

stat.ResidTrans Residuals associated with linear fit of transformed data

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression
based on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression
based on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

138 Alphabetical Listing

Prgm Catalogue >
Prgm Calculate GCD and display intermediate
Block results.
EndPrgm
Template for creating a user-defined
programme. Must be used with the
Define, Define LibPub or Define LibPriv
command.
Block can be a single statement, a series
of statements separated with the “:”
character or a series of statements on
separate lines.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

prodSeq() See Π(), page 227.

Product (PI) See Π(), page 227.

product() Catalogue >

product(List[, Start[,
End]])⇒expression
Returns the product of the elements
contained in List. Start and End are
optional. They specify a range of
elements.

Alphabetical Listing 139

 product() Catalogue >
product(Matrix1[, Start[,
End]])⇒matrix
Returns a row vector containing the
products of the elements in the columns
of Matrix1. Start and end are optional.
They specify a range of rows.
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements,
see page 255.

propFrac() Catalogue >

propFrac(Expr1[, Var])⇒expression
propFrac(rational_number) returns
rational_number as the sum of an
integer and a fraction having the same
sign and a greater denominator
magnitude than numerator magnitude.
propFrac(rational_expression,Var)
returns the sum of proper ratios and a
polynomial with respect to Var. The
degree of Var in the denominator
exceeds the degree of Var in the
numerator in each proper ratio. Similar
powers of Var are collected. The terms
and their factors are sorted with Var as
the main variable.
If Var is omitted, a proper fraction
expansion is done with respect to the
most main variable. The coefficients of
the polynomial part are then made
proper with respect to their most main
variable first and so on.
For rational expressions, propFrac() is a
faster but less extreme alternative to
expand().
You can use the propFrac() function to
represent mixed fractions and
demonstrate addition and subtraction of
mixed fractions.

140 Alphabetical Listing

Q

QR Catalogue >
QR Matrix, qMatrix, rMatrix[, Tol] The floating-point number (9.) in m1 causes
results to be calculated in floating-point form.
Calculates the Householder QR
factorization of a real or complex matrix.
The resulting Q and R matrices are
stored to the specified Matrix. The Q
matrix is unitary. The R matrix is upper
triangular.
Optionally, any matrix element is treated
as zero if its absolute value is less than
Tol. This tolerance is used only if the
matrix has floating-point entries and
does not contain any symbolic variables
that have not been assigned a value.
Otherwise, Tol is ignored.

• If you use /· or set the Auto or

Approximate mode to Approximate,
computations are done using floating-
point arithmetic.
• If Tol is omitted or not used, the
default tolerance is calculated as:
5EL14 ·max(dim(Matrix)) ·rowNorm
(Matrix)
The QR factorization is computed
numerically using Householder
transformations. The symbolic solution is
computed using Gram-Schmidt. The
columns in qMatName are the
orthonormal basis vectors that span the
space defined by matrix.

QuadReg Catalogue >

QuadReg X,Y [, Freq] [, Category, Include]]

Alphabetical Listing 141

 QuadReg Catalogue >
Computes the quadratic polynomial regressiony =
a·x2+b·x+con lists X and Y with frequency Freq. A
summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable (page 178).
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers | 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a·x2+b·x+c

stat.a, stat.b, Regression coefficients

stat.c

stat.R2 Coefficient of determination

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

QuartReg Catalogue >

QuartReg X,Y [, Freq] [, Category, Include]]

142 Alphabetical Listing

QuartReg Catalogue >
Computes the quartic polynomial regressiony =
a·x4+b·x3+c· x2+d·x+eon lists X and Y with
frequency Freq. A summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable (page 178).
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers | 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a·x4+b·x3+c· x2+d·x+e

stat.a, stat.b, Regression coefficients

stat.c, stat.d,
stat.e

stat.R2 Coefficient of determination

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression
based on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression
based on restrictions of Freq, Category List and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

R►Pθ() Catalogue >

R►Pθ (xExpr, yExpr) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

Alphabetical Listing 143

 R►Pθ() Catalogue >

R►Pθ (xList, yList) ⇒ list

R►Pθ (xMatrix, yMatrix) ⇒ matrix
Returns the equivalent θ-coordinate of
In Gradian angle mode:
the
(x,y) pair arguments.
Note: The result is returned as a degree,
gradian or radian angle, according to the
current angle mode setting.
In Radian angle mode:
Note: You can insert this function from
the computer keyboard by typing
R@>Ptheta(...).

R►Pr() Catalogue >

R►Pr (xExpr, yExpr) ⇒ expression In Radian angle mode:

R►Pr (xList, yList) ⇒ list

R►Pr (xMatrix, yMatrix) ⇒ matrix
Returns the equivalent r-coordinate of
the (x,y) pair arguments.
Note: You can insert this function from
the computer keyboard by typing R@>Pr
(...).

►Rad Catalogue >

Expr1►Rad ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

Converts the argument to radian angle

measure.
Note: You can insert this operator from In Gradian angle mode:
the computer keyboard by typing
@>Rad.

144 Alphabetical Listing

rand() Catalogue >
rand() ⇒ expression Set the random-number seed.
rand(#Trials) ⇒ list
rand() returns a random value between 0
and 1.
rand(#Trials) returns a list containing
#Trials random values between 0 and 1.

randBin() Catalogue >

randBin(n, p) ⇒ expression
randBin(n, p, #Trials) ⇒ list
randBin(n, p) returns a random real
number from a specified Binomial
distribution.
randBin(n, p, #Trials) returns a list
containing #Trials random real numbers
from a specified Binomial distribution.

randInt() Catalogue >

randInt
(
lowBound,upBound)
⇒ expression
randInt
(lowBound,upBound
,#Trials) ⇒ list
randInt
(
lowBound,upBound)
returns a random
integer within the
range specified by
lowBound and
upBound integer
bounds.
randInt
(lowBound,upBound
,#Trials) returns a
list containing
#Trials random
integers within the
specified range.

Alphabetical Listing 145

 randMat() Catalogue >
randMat(numRows, numColumns) ⇒
matrix
Returns a matrix of integers between -9
and 9 of the specified dimension.
Both arguments must simplify to Note: The values in this matrix will change
integers. each time you press ·.

randNorm() Catalogue >

randNorm(μ, σ) ⇒ expression
randNorm(μ, σ, #Trials) ⇒ list
randNorm(μ, σ) returns a decimal
number from the specified normal
distribution. It could be any real number
but will be heavily concentrated in the
interval [μ−3•σ, μ+3•σ].
randNorm(μ, σ, #Trials) returns a list
containing #Trials decimal numbers
from the specified normal distribution.

randPoly() Catalogue >

randPoly(Var, Order) ⇒ expression
Returns a polynomial in Var of the
specified Order. The coefficients are
random integers in the range −9 through
9. The leading coefficient will not be
zero.
Order must be 0–99.

randSamp() Catalogue >

randSamp(List,#Trials[,noRepl]) ⇒ list
Returns a list containing a random
sample of #Trials trials from List with an
option for sample replacement
(noRepl=0), or no sample replacement
(noRepl=1). The default is with sample
replacement.

146 Alphabetical Listing

RandSeed Catalogue >
RandSeed Number
If Number = 0, sets the seeds to the
factory defaults for the random-number
generator. If Number ≠ 0, it is used to
generate two seeds, which are stored in
system variables seed1 and seed2.

real() Catalogue >

real(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Returns the real part of the argument.
Note: All undefined variables are treated
as real variables. See also imag(), page
90.
real(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the real parts of all elements.
real(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns the real parts of all elements.

►Rect Catalogue >

Vector ►Rect
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>Rect.
Displays Vector in rectangular form [x, y,
z]. The vector must be of dimension 2 or
3 and can be a row or a column.
Note: ►Rect is a display-format
instruction, not a conversion function.
You can use it only at the end of an entry
line, and it does not update ans.
Note: See also ►Polar, page 134.
complexValue ►Rect In Radian angle mode:

Alphabetical Listing 147

 ►Rect Catalogue >
Displays complexValue in rectangular
form a+bi. The complexValue can have
any complex form. However, an reiθ
entry causes an error in Degree angle
mode.
Note: You must use parentheses for an
(r∠ θ) polar entry. In Gradian angle mode:

In Degree angle mode:

Note: To type ∠ , select it from the symbol list

in the Catalogue.

ref() Catalogue >

ref(Matrix1[, Tol]) ⇒ matrix
Returns the row echelon form of
Matrix1.
Optionally, any matrix element is treated
as zero if its absolute value is less than
Tol. This tolerance is used only if the
matrix has floating-point entries and
does not contain any symbolic variables
that have not been assigned a value.
Otherwise, Tol is ignored.

• If you use /· or set the Auto or

Approximate mode to Approximate,
computations are done using floating-
point arithmetic.
• If Tol is omitted or not used, the
default tolerance is calculated as:
5E−14 •max(dim(Matrix1)) •rowNorm
(Matrix1)
Avoid undefined elements in Matrix1.
They can lead to unexpected results.
For example, if a is undefined in the
following expression, a warning message
appears and the result is shown as:

148 Alphabetical Listing

ref() Catalogue >

The warning appears because the

generalized element 1/a would not be
valid for a=0.
You can avoid this by storing a value to a
beforehand or by using the constraint
(“|”) operator to substitute a value, as
shown in the following example.

Note: See also rref(), page 158.

RefreshProbeVars Catalogue >

RefreshProbeVars Example
Allows you to access sensor data from Define temp()=
all connected sensor probes in your TI-
Prgm
Basic program.
© Check if system is ready
StatusVar
Status RefreshProbeVars status
Value
statusVar Normal (continue with the If status=0 Then
=0 program)
The Vernier DataQuest™ Disp "ready"
application is in data For n,1,50
collection mode.
statusVar Note: The Vernier RefreshProbeVars status
=1 DataQuest™ application must temperature:=meter.temperature
be in meter mode for this
Disp "Temperature: ",temperature
command to work.
If temperature>30 Then
statusVar The Vernier DataQuest™
=2 application is not launched. Disp "Too hot"
statusVar The Vernier DataQuest™
EndIf
=3 application is launched, but

Alphabetical Listing 149

 RefreshProbeVars Catalogue >
StatusVar © Wait for 1 second between
Status samples
Value
you have not connected any Wait 1
probes.
EndFor

Else

Disp "Not ready. Try again

later"

EndIf

EndPrgm

Note: This can also be used with TI-

Innovator™ Hub.

remain() Catalogue >

remain(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ expression

remain(List1, List2) ⇒ list

remain(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix
Returns the remainder of the first
argument with respect to the second
argument as defined by the identities:
remain(x,0) x
remain(x,y) x−y•iPart(x/y)
As a consequence, note that remain
(−x,y) − remain(x,y). The result is either
zero or it has the same sign as the first
argument.
Note: See also mod(), page 116.

Request Catalogue >

Request promptString, var[, DispFlag Define a program:
[, statusVar]] Define request_demo()=Prgm
Request “Radius: ”,r
Request promptString, func(arg1, Disp “Area = “,pi*r2
...argn) [, DispFlag [, statusVar]] EndPrgm

150 Alphabetical Listing

Request Catalogue >
Programming command: Pauses the Run the program and type a response:
program and displays a dialog box request_demo()
containing the message promptString
and an input box for the user’s response.
When the user types a response and
clicks OK, the contents of the input box
are assigned to variable var.
If the user clicks Cancel, the program
proceeds without accepting any input.
The program uses the previous value of Result after selecting OK:
var if var was already defined. Radius: 6/2
Area= 28.2743
The optional DispFlag argument can be
any expression.
• If DispFlag is omitted or evaluates to
1, the prompt message and user’s
response are displayed in the
Calculator history.
• If DispFlag evaluates to 0, the prompt
and response are not displayed in the
history.
The optional statusVar argument gives Define a program:
the program a way to determine how Define polynomial()=Prgm
the user dismissed the dialog box. Note Request "Enter a polynomial in
that statusVar requires the DispFlag x:",p(x)
argument. Disp "Real roots are:",polyRoots(p
(x),x)
EndPrgm
• If the user clicked OK or pressed Enter
or Ctrl+Enter, variable statusVar is set
to a value of 1. Run the program and type a response:
• Otherwise, variable statusVar is set to
polynomial()
a value of 0.
The func() argument allows a program to
store the user’s response as a function
definition. This syntax operates as if the
user executed the command:
Define func(arg1, ...argn) = user’s Result after entering x^3+3x+1 and selecting
response OK:
Real roots are: {-0.322185}

Alphabetical Listing 151

 Request Catalogue >
The program can then use the defined
function func(). The promptString
should guide the user to enter an
appropriate user’s response that
completes the function definition.
Note: You can use the Request command
within a user-defined program but not
within a function.
To stop a program that contains a
Request command inside an infinite
loop:

• Handheld: Hold down the c key

and press · repeatedly.
• Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and
press Enter repeatedly.
• Macintosh®: Hold down the F5 key and
press Enter repeatedly.
• iPad®: The app displays a prompt. You
can continue waiting or cancel.
Note: See also RequestStr, page 152.

RequestStr Catalogue >

RequestStr promptString, var[, Define a program:
DispFlag] Define requestStr_demo()=Prgm
RequestStr “Your name:”,name,0
Programming command: Operates Disp “Response has “,dim(name),”
identically to the first syntax of the characters.”
Request command, except that the EndPrgm
user’s response is always interpreted as
a string. By contrast, the Request
command interprets the response as an Run the program and type a response:
expression unless the user encloses it in requestStr_demo()
quotation marks (““).
Note: You can use the RequestStr
command within a user-defined program
but not within a function.
To stop a program that contains a
RequestStr command inside an infinite
loop:

• Handheld: Hold down the c key

152 Alphabetical Listing

RequestStr Catalogue >
and press · repeatedly. Result after selecting OK (Note that the
DispFlag argument of 0 omits the prompt
• Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and
and response from the history):
press Enter repeatedly.
• Macintosh®: Hold down the F5 key and
press Enter repeatedly. requestStr_demo()
• iPad®: The app displays a prompt. You Response has 5 characters.
can continue waiting or cancel.
Note: See also Request, page 150.

Return Catalogue >

Return [Expr]
Returns Expr as the result of the
function. Use within a Func...EndFunc
block.
Note: Use Return without an argument
within a Prgm...EndPrgm block to exit a
program.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

right() Catalogue >

right(List1[, Num]) ⇒ list
Returns the rightmost Num elements
contained in List1.
If you omit Num, returns all of List1.
right(sourceString[, Num]) ⇒ string
Returns the rightmost Num characters
contained in character string
sourceString.
If you omit Num, returns all of
sourceString.
right(Comparison) ⇒ expression
Returns the right side of an equation or
inequality.

Alphabetical Listing 153

 rk23 () Catalogue >
rk23(Expr, Var, depVar, {Var0, Differential equation:
VarMax}, depVar0, VarStep [, diftol])
⇒ matrix y'=0.001*y*(100-y) and y(0)=10

rk23(SystemOfExpr, Var,
ListOfDepVars, {Var0, VarMax},
ListOfDepVars0, VarStep[, diftol]) ⇒
matrix
To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
rk23(ListOfExpr, Var, ListOfDepVars, 7 and 8 to move the cursor.
{Var0, VarMax}, ListOfDepVars0,
Same equation with diftol set to 1.E−6
VarStep[, diftol]) ⇒ matrix
Uses the Runge-Kutta method to solve
the system

Compare above result with CAS exact solution

with depVar(Var0)=depVar0 on the obtained using deSolve() and seqGen():
interval [Var0,VarMax]. Returns a
matrix whose first row defines the Var
output values as defined by VarStep.
The second row defines the value of the
first solution component at the
corresponding Var values, and so on.
Expr is the right hand side that defines
the ordinary differential equation (ODE).
SystemOfExpr is a system of right-hand
sides that define the system of ODEs System of equations:
(corresponds to order of dependent
variables in ListOfDepVars).
ListOfExpr is a list of right-hand sides
that define the system of ODEs with y1(0)=2 and y2(0)=5
(corresponds to order of dependent
variables in ListOfDepVars).
Var is the independent variable.
ListOfDepVars is a list of dependent
variables.
{Var0, VarMax} is a two-element list
that tells the function to integrate from
Var0 to VarMax.
ListOfDepVars0 is a list of initial values
for dependent variables.

154 Alphabetical Listing

rk23 () Catalogue >
If VarStep evaluates to a nonzero
number: sign(VarStep) = sign(VarMax-
Var0) and solutions are returned at
Var0+i*VarStep for all i=0,1,2,… such
that Var0+i*VarStep is in
[var0,VarMax] (may not get a solution
value at VarMax).
if VarStep evaluates to zero, solutions
are returned at the "Runge-Kutta" Var
values.
diftol is the error tolerance (defaults to
0.001).

root() Catalogue >

root(Expr) ⇒ root
root(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ root
root(Expr) returns the square root of
Expr.
root(Expr1, Expr2) returns the Expr2
root of Expr1. Expr1 can be a real or
complex floating point constant, an
integer or complex rational constant, or
a general symbolic expression.
Note: See also Nth root template, page 2.

rotate() Catalogue >

rotate(Integer1[,#ofRotations]) ⇒ In Bin base mode:
integer
Rotates the bits in a binary integer. You
can enter Integer1 in any number base; it
is converted automatically to a signed, 64-
bit binary form. If the magnitude of
Integer1 is too large for this form, a To see the entire result, press 5 and then
symmetric modulo operation brings it use 7 and 8 to move the cursor.
within the range. For more information,
see ►Base2, page 17.
If #ofRotations is positive, the rotation is In Hex base mode:
to the left. If #ofRotations is negative, the
rotation is to the right. The default is −1
(rotate right one bit).

Alphabetical Listing 155

 rotate() Catalogue >
For example, in a right rotation:

Each bit rotates right. Important: To enter a binary or hexadecimal

number, always use the 0b or 0h prefix
0b00000000000001111010110000110101 (zero, not the letter O).
Rightmost bit rotates to leftmost.
produces:
0b10000000000000111101011000011010
The result is displayed according to the
Base mode.
rotate(List1[,#ofRotations]) ⇒ list In Dec base mode:

Returns a copy of List1 rotated right or left

by #of Rotations elements. Does not alter
List1.
If #ofRotations is positive, the rotation is
to the left. If #of Rotations is negative, the
rotation is to the right. The default is −1
(rotate right one element).
rotate(String1[,#ofRotations]) ⇒ string
Returns a copy of String1 rotated right or
left by #ofRotations characters. Does not
alter String1.
If #ofRotations is positive, the rotation is
to the left. If #ofRotations is negative, the
rotation is to the right. The default is −1
(rotate right one character).

round() Catalogue >

round(Expr1[, digits]) ⇒ expression
Returns the argument rounded to the
specified number of digits after the
decimal point.
digits must be an integer in the range 0–
12. If digits is not included, returns the
argument rounded to 12 significant
digits.

156 Alphabetical Listing

round() Catalogue >
Note: Display digits mode may affect
how this is displayed.
round(List1[, digits]) ⇒ list
Returns a list of the elements rounded to
the specified number of digits.
round(Matrix1[, digits]) ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix of the elements
rounded to the specified number of
digits.

rowAdd() Catalogue >

rowAdd(Matrix1, rIndex1, rIndex2) ⇒
matrix
Returns a copy of Matrix1 with row
rIndex2 replaced by the sum of rows
rIndex1 and rIndex2.

rowDim() Catalogue >

rowDim(Matrix) ⇒ expression
Returns the number of rows in Matrix.
Note: See also colDim(), page 26.

rowNorm() Catalogue >

rowNorm(Matrix) ⇒ expression
Returns the maximum of the sums of the
absolute values of the elements in the
rows in Matrix.
Note: All matrix elements must simplify
to numbers. See also colNorm(), page 26.

Alphabetical Listing 157

 rowSwap() Catalogue >
rowSwap(Matrix1, rIndex1, rIndex2)
⇒ matrix
Returns Matrix1 with rows rIndex1 and
rIndex2 exchanged.

rref() Catalogue >

rref(Matrix1[, Tol]) ⇒ matrix
Returns the reduced row echelon form
of Matrix1.

Optionally, any matrix element is treated

as zero if its absolute value is less than
Tol. This tolerance is used only if the
matrix has floating-point entries and
does not contain any symbolic variables
that have not been assigned a value.
Otherwise, Tol is ignored.

• If you use /· or set the Auto or

Approximate mode to Approximate,
computations are done using floating-
point arithmetic.
• If Tol is omitted or not used, the
default tolerance is calculated as:
5E−14 •max(dim(Matrix1)) •rowNorm
(Matrix1)
Note: See also ref(), page 148.

sec() µ key
sec(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

sec(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the secant of Expr1 or returns a
list containing the secants of all elements
in List1.

158 Alphabetical Listing

sec() µ key
Note: The argument is interpreted as a
degree, gradian or radian angle,
according to the current angle mode
setting. You can use °, G, or r to override
the angle mode temporarily.

sec-1() µ key
sec-1(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

sec-1(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the angle whose secant is Expr1
or returns a list containing the inverse In Gradian angle mode:
secants of each element of List1.
Note: The result is returned as a degree,
gradian or radian angle, according to the
current angle mode setting.
In Radian angle mode:
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing arcsec(...).

sech() Catalogue >

sech(Expr1) ⇒ expression

sech(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the hyperbolic secant of Expr1
or returns a list containing the
hyperbolic secants of the List1 elements.

sech-1() Catalogue >

sech-1(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Radian angle and Rectangular complex
mode:
sech-1(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the inverse hyperbolic secant of
Expr1 or returns a list containing the
inverse hyperbolic secants of each
element of List1.
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing arcsech(...).

Alphabetical Listing 159

 Send Hub Menu
Send exprOrString1[, exprOrString2] ... Example: Turn on the blue element of the
built-in RGB LED for 0.5 seconds.
Programming command: Sends one or
more TI-Innovator™ Hub commands to a
connected hub.
exprOrString must be a valid TI-
Innovator™ Hub Command. Typically, Example: Request the current value of the
exprOrString contains a "SET ..." hub's built-in light-level sensor. A Get
command to control a device or a command retrieves the value and assigns it to
"READ ..." command to request data. variable lightval.

The arguments are sent to the hub in

succession.
Note: You can use the Send command
within a user-defined programme but
not within a function.
Example: Send a calculated frequency to the
Note: See also Get (page 79), GetStr hub's built-in speaker. Use special variable
(page 85), and eval() (page 63). iostr.SendAns to show the hub command
with the expression evaluated.

seq() Catalogue >

seq(Expr, Var, Low, High[, Step]) ⇒
list
Increments Var from Low through High
by an increment of Step, evaluates Expr,
and returns the results as a list. The
original contents of Var are still there
after seq() is completed.
Note: To force an approximate result,
The default value for Step = 1.
Handheld: Press / ·.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter.
Macintosh®: Press “+Enter.
iPad®: Hold enter, and select .

160 Alphabetical Listing

seqGen() Catalogue >
seqGen(Expr, Var, depVar, {Var0, Generate the first 5 terms of the sequence u
VarMax}[, ListOfInitTerms (n) = u(n-1)2/2, with u(1)=2 and VarStep=1.
[, VarStep[, CeilingValue]]]) ⇒ list
Generates a list of terms for sequence
depVar(Var)=Expr as follows:
Increments independent variable Var
from Var0 through VarMax by VarStep,
evaluates depVar(Var) for
corresponding values of Var using the
Expr formula and ListOfInitTerms, and
returns the results as a list. Example in which Var0=2:

seqGen(ListOrSystemOfExpr, Var,
ListOfDepVars, {Var0, VarMax} [
, MatrixOfInitTerms[, VarStep[,
CeilingValue]]]) ⇒ matrix
Generates a matrix of terms for a system
(or list) of sequences ListOfDepVars
(Var)=ListOrSystemOfExpr as follows: Example in which initial term is symbolic:
Increments independent variable Var
from Var0 through VarMax by VarStep,
evaluates ListOfDepVars(Var) for
corresponding values of Var using
ListOrSystemOfExpr formula and System of two sequences:
MatrixOfInitTerms, and returns the
results as a matrix.
The original contents of Var are
unchanged after seqGen() is completed.
The default value for VarStep = 1.

Note: The Void (_) in the initial term matrix

above is used to indicate that the initial term
for u1(n) is calculated using the explicit
sequence formula u1(n)=1/n.

seqn() Catalogue >

seqn(Expr(u, n[, ListOfInitTerms[, Generate the first 6 terms of the sequence u
nMax[, CeilingValue]]]) ⇒ list (n) = u(n-1)/2, with u(1)=2.

Alphabetical Listing 161

 seqn() Catalogue >
Generates a list of terms for a sequence
u(n)=Expr(u, n) as follows: Increments n
from 1 through nMax by 1, evaluates u
(n) for corresponding values of n using
the Expr(u, n) formula and
ListOfInitTerms, and returns the results
as a list.
seqn(Expr(n[, nMax[, CeilingValue]])
⇒ list
Generates a list of terms for a non-
recursive sequence u(n)=Expr(n) as
follows: Increments n from 1 through
nMax by 1, evaluates u(n) for
corresponding values of n using the Expr
(n) formula, and returns the results as a
list.
If nMax is missing, nMax is set to 2500
If nMax=0, nMax is set to 2500
Note: seqn() calls seqGen( ) with n0=1
and nstep =1

series() Catalogue >

series(Expr1, Var, Order[, Point]) ⇒
expression
series(Expr1, Var, Order[, Point]) |
Var>Point ⇒ expression
series(Expr1, Var, Order[, Point]) |
Var<Point ⇒ expression

Returns a generalized truncated power

series representation of Expr1 expanded
about Point through degree Order.
Order can be any rational number. The
resulting powers of (Var − Point) can
include negative and/or fractional
exponents. The coefficients of these
powers can include logarithms of
(Var − Point) and other functions of Var
that are dominated by all powers of (Var
− Point) having the same exponent sign.

162 Alphabetical Listing

series() Catalogue >
Point defaults to 0. Point can be ∞ or
−∞, in which cases the expansion is
through degree Order in 1/(Var −
Point).
series(...) returns “series(...)” if it is
unable to determine such a
representation, such as for essential
singularities such as sin(1/z) at z=0, e−1/z
at z=0, or ez at z = ∞ or −∞.
If the series or one of its derivatives has
a jump discontinuity at Point, the result
is likely to contain sub-expressions of the
form sign(…) or abs(…) for a real
expansion variable or (-1)floor(…angle(…)…)
for a complex expansion variable, which
is one ending with “_”. If you intend to
use the series only for values on one side
of Point, then append the appropriate
one of “| Var > Point”, “| Var < Point”,
“| “Var ≥ Point”, or “Var ≤ Point” to
obtain a simpler result.
series() can provide symbolic
approximations to indefinite integrals
and definite integrals for which symbolic
solutions otherwise can't be obtained.
series() distributes over 1st-argument
lists and matrices.
series() is a generalized version of taylor
().
As illustrated by the last example to the
right, the display routines downstream
of the result produced by series(...)
might rearrange terms so that the
dominant term is not the leftmost one.
Note: See also dominantTerm(), page 56.

setMode() Catalogue >

setMode(modeNameInteger, Display approximate value of π using the
settingInteger) ⇒ integer default setting for Display Digits, and then
setMode(list) ⇒ integer list display π with a setting of Fix2. Check to see
that the default is restored after the program
Valid only within a function or program. executes.

Alphabetical Listing 163

 setMode() Catalogue >
setMode(modeNameInteger,
settingInteger) temporarily sets mode
modeNameInteger to the new setting
settingInteger, and returns an integer
corresponding to the original setting of
that mode. The change is limited to the
duration of the program/function’s
execution.
modeNameInteger specifies which mode
you want to set. It must be one of the
mode integers from the table below.
settingInteger specifies the new setting
for the mode. It must be one of the
setting integers listed below for the
specific mode you are setting.
setMode(list) lets you change multiple
settings. list contains pairs of mode
integers and setting integers. setMode
(list) returns a similar list whose integer
pairs represent the original modes and
settings.
If you have saved all mode settings with
getMode(0)→var, you can use setMode
(var) to restore those settings until the
function or program exits. See getMode
(), page 84.
Note: The current mode settings are
passed to called subroutines. If any
subroutine changes a mode setting, the
mode change will be lost when control
returns to the calling routine.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

164 Alphabetical Listing

Mode Mode
Name Integer Setting Integers
Display Digits 1 1=Float, 2=Float1, 3=Float2, 4=Float3, 5=Float4,
6=Float5, 7=Float6, 8=Float7, 9=Float8, 10=Float9,
11=Float10, 12=Float11, 13=Float12, 14=Fix0, 15=Fix1,
16=Fix2, 17=Fix3, 18=Fix4, 19=Fix5, 20=Fix6, 21=Fix7,
22=Fix8, 23=Fix9, 24=Fix10, 25=Fix11, 26=Fix12
Angle 2 1=Radian, 2=Degree, 3=Gradian
Exponential 3 1=Normal, 2=Scientific, 3=Engineering
Format
Real or 4 1=Real, 2=Rectangular, 3=Polar
Complex
Auto or 5 1=Auto, 2=Approximate, 3=Exact
Approx.
Vector Format 6 1=Rectangular, 2=Cylindrical, 3=Spherical
Base 7 1=Decimal, 2=Hex, 3=Binary
Unit system 8 1=SI, 2=Eng/US

shift() Catalogue >

shift(Integer1[,#ofShifts]) ⇒ integer In Bin base mode:

Shifts the bits in a binary integer. You can

enter Integer1 in any number base; it is
converted automatically to a signed, 64-bit
binary form. If the magnitude of Integer1
is too large for this form, a symmetric
modulo operation brings it within the In Hex base mode:
range. For more information, see ►Base2,
page 17.
If #ofShifts is positive, the shift is to the
left. If #ofShifts is negative, the shift is to
the right. The default is −1 (shift right one
bit). Important: To enter a binary or hexadecimal
number, always use the 0b or 0h prefix
In a right shift, the rightmost bit is dropped (zero, not the letter O).
and 0 or 1 is inserted to match the
leftmost bit. In a left shift, the leftmost bit
is dropped and 0 is inserted as the
rightmost bit.
For example, in a right shift:
Each bit shifts right.
0b0000000000000111101011000011010

Alphabetical Listing 165

 shift() Catalogue >
Inserts 0 if leftmost bit is 0,
or 1 if leftmost bit is 1.
produces:
0b00000000000000111101011000011010
The result is displayed according to the
Base mode. Leading zeros are not shown.
shift(List1[,#ofShifts]) ⇒ list In Dec base mode:

Returns a copy of List1 shifted right or left

by #ofShifts elements. Does not alter
List1.
If #ofShifts is positive, the shift is to the
left. If #ofShifts is negative, the shift is to
the right. The default is −1 (shift right one
element).
Elements introduced at the beginning or
end of list by the shift are set to the
symbol “undef”.
shift(String1[,#ofShifts]) ⇒ string
Returns a copy of String1 shifted right or
left by #ofShifts characters. Does not alter
String1.
If #ofShifts is positive, the shift is to the
left. If #ofShifts is negative, the shift is to
the right. The default is −1 (shift right one
character).
Characters introduced at the beginning or
end of string by the shift are set to a
space.

sign() Catalogue >

sign(Expr1) ⇒ expression

sign(List1) ⇒ list
sign(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
For real and complex Expr1, returns
Expr1/abs(Expr1) when Expr1≠ 0. If complex format mode is Real:

Returns 1 if Expr1 is positive. Returns −1

if Expr1is negative.

166 Alphabetical Listing

sign() Catalogue >
sign(0) represents the unit circle in the
complex domain.
For a list or matrix, returns the signs of
all the elements.

simult() Catalogue >

simult(coeffMatrix, constVector[, Tol]) Solve for x and y:
⇒ matrix x + 2y = 1
3x + 4y = −1
Returns a column vector that contains
the solutions to a system of linear
equations.
Note: See also linSolve(), page 103. The solution is x=−3 and y=2.
coeffMatrix must be a square matrix
that contains the coefficients of the Solve:
equations. ax + by = 1
cx + dy = 2
constVector must have the same
number of rows (same dimension) as
coeffMatrix and contain the constants.
Optionally, any matrix element is treated
as zero if its absolute value is less than
Tol. This tolerance is used only if the
matrix has floating-point entries and
does not contain any symbolic variables
that have not been assigned a value.
Otherwise, Tol is ignored.
• If you set the Auto or Approximate
mode to Approximate, computations
are done using floating-point
arithmetic.
• If Tol is omitted or not used, the
default tolerance is calculated as:
5E−14 •max(dim(coeffMatrix))
•rowNorm(coeffMatrix)
simult(coeffMatrix, constMatrix[, Tol]) Solve:
⇒ matrix x + 2y = 1
3x + 4y = −1
Solves multiple systems of linear
equations, where each system has the x + 2y = 2
same equation coefficients but different 3x + 4y = −3
constants.

Alphabetical Listing 167

 simult() Catalogue >
Each column in constMatrix must
contain the constants for a system of
equations. Each column in the resulting
matrix contains the solution for the
corresponding system. For the first system, x=−3 and y=2. For the
second system, x=−7 and y=9/2.

►sin Catalogue >

Expr►sin
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing
@>sin.
Represents Expr in terms of sine. This is
a display conversion operator. It can be
used only at the end of the entry line.
►sin reduces all powers of
cos(...) modulo 1−sin(...)^2
so that any remaining powers of sin(...)
have exponents in the range (0, 2). Thus,
the result will be free of cos(...) if and
only if cos(...) occurs in the given
expression only to even powers.
Note: This conversion operator is not
supported in Degree or Gradian Angle
modes. Before using it, make sure that
the Angle mode is set to Radians and
that Expr does not contain explicit
references to degree or gradian angles.

sin() µ key
sin(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

sin(List1) ⇒ list
sin(Expr1) returns the sine of the
argument as an expression.
sin(List1) returns a list of the sines of all
elements in List1.

In Gradian angle mode:

168 Alphabetical Listing

sin() µ key
Note: The argument is interpreted as a
degree, gradian or radian angle,
according to the current angle mode.
You can use °, g, or r to override the
angle mode setting temporarily. In Radian angle mode:

sin(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix sine of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the sine of each element. For
information about the calculation
method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.

sin-1() µ key
sin-1(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

sin-1(List1) ⇒ list
sin-1(Expr1) returns the angle whose
sine is Expr1 as an expression. In Gradian angle mode:
sin-1(List1) returns a list of the inverse
sines of each element of List1.
Note: The result is returned as a degree,
In Radian angle mode:
gradian or radian angle, according to the
current angle mode setting.
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing arcsin(...).
sin-1(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode and Rectangular
complex format mode:
Returns the matrix inverse sine of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the inverse sine of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos().

Alphabetical Listing 169

 sin-1() µ key
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.

sinh() Catalogue >

sinh(Expr1) ⇒ expression

sinh(List1) ⇒ list
sinh (Expr1) returns the hyperbolic sine
of the argument as an expression.
sinh (List1) returns a list of the
hyperbolic sines of each element of
List1.
sinh(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix hyperbolic sine of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the hyperbolic sine of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.

sinh-1() Catalogue >

sinh-1(Expr1) ⇒ expression

sinh-1(List1) ⇒ list
sinh-1(Expr1) returns the inverse
hyperbolic sine of the argument as an
expression.
sinh-1(List1) returns a list of the inverse
hyperbolic sines of each element of
List1.
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing arcsinh(...).
sinh-1(squareMatrix1) ⇒ In Radian angle mode:
squareMatrix

170 Alphabetical Listing

sinh-1() Catalogue >
Returns the matrix inverse hyperbolic
sine of squareMatrix1. This is not the
same as calculating the inverse
hyperbolic sine of each element. For
information about the calculation
method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.

SinReg Catalogue >

SinReg X, Y[, [Iterations],[Period][, Category,
Include]]
Computes the sinusoidal regression on lists X and Y.
A summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable. (See page 178.)
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.
Iterations is a value that specifies the maximum
number of times (1 through 16) a solution will be
attempted. If omitted, 8 is used. Typically, larger
values result in better accuracy but longer execution
times, and vice versa.
Period specifies an estimated period. If omitted, the
difference between values in X should be equal and
in sequential order. If you specify Period, the
differences between x values can be unequal.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
The output of SinReg is always in radians, regardless
of the angle mode setting.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 255.

Alphabetical Listing 171

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: a•sin(bx+c)+d

stat.a, stat.b, Regression coefficients

stat.c, stat.d

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based
on restrictions of Freq, Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

solve() Catalogue >

solve(Equation, Var) ⇒ Boolean
expression
solve(Equation, Var=Guess) ⇒
Boolean expression
solve(Inequality, Var) ⇒ Boolean
expression
Returns candidate real solutions of an
equation or an inequality for Var. The
goal is to return candidates for all
solutions. However, there might be
equations or inequalities for which the
number of solutions is infinite.
Solution candidates might not be real
finite solutions for some combinations of
values for undefined variables.

For the Auto setting of the Auto or

Approximate mode, the goal is to
produce exact solutions when they are
concise, and supplemented by iterative
searches with approximate arithmetic
when exact solutions are impractical.
Due to default cancellation of the
greatest common divisor from the
numerator and denominator of ratios,
solutions might be solutions only in the
limit from one or both sides.

172 Alphabetical Listing

solve() Catalogue >
For inequalities of types ≥, ≤, <, or >,
explicit solutions are unlikely unless the
inequality is linear and contains only
Var.
For the Exact mode, portions that cannot
be solved are returned as an implicit
equation or inequality.
Use the constraint (“|”) operator to In Radian angle mode:
restrict the solution interval and/or
other variables that occur in the
equation or inequality. When you find a
solution in one interval, you can use the
inequality operators to exclude that
interval from subsequent searches.
false is returned when no real solutions
are found. true is returned if solve() can
determine that any finite real value of
Var satisfies the equation or inequality.
Since solve() always returns a Boolean
result, you can use “and,” “or,” and
“not” to combine results from solve()
with each other or with other Boolean
expressions.
Solutions might contain a unique new In Radian angle mode:
undefined constant of the form nj with j
being an integer in the interval 1–255.
Such variables designate an arbitrary
integer.
In Real mode, fractional powers having
odd denominators denote only the real
branch. Otherwise, multiple branched
expressions such as fractional powers,
logarithms, and inverse trigonometric
functions denote only the principal
branch. Consequently, solve() produces
only solutions corresponding to that one
real or principal branch.
Note: See also cSolve(), cZeros(), nSolve(),
and zeros().

Alphabetical Listing 173

 solve() Catalogue >
solve(Eqn1 and Eqn2[and …],
VarOrGuess1, VarOrGuess2[, …])
⇒ Boolean expression
solve(SystemOfEqns, VarOrGuess1,
VarOrGuess2[, …])
⇒ Boolean expression
solve({Eqn1, Eqn2 [,...]}
{VarOrGuess1,VarOrGuess2 [, … ]})
⇒ Boolean expression
Returns candidate real solutions to the
simultaneous algebraic equations, where
each VarOrGuess specifies a variable
that you want to solve for.
You can separate the equations with the
and operator, or you can enter a
SystemOfEqns using a template from
the Catalogue. The number of
VarOrGuess arguments must match the
number of equations. Optionally, you
can specify an initial guess for a variable.
Each VarOrGuess must have the form:
variable
– or –
variable = real or non-real number
For example, x is valid and so is x=3.
If all of the equations are polynomials
and if you do NOT specify any initial
guesses, solve() uses the lexical
Gröbner/Buchberger elimination method
to attempt to determine all real
solutions.
For example, suppose you have a circle
of radius r at the origin and another
circle of radius r centred where the first
circle crosses the positive x-axis. Use
solve() to find the intersections.

174 Alphabetical Listing

solve() Catalogue >
As illustrated by r in the example to the
right, simultaneous polynomial
equations can have extra variables that
have no values, but represent given
numeric values that could be substituted
later.
You can also (or instead) include solution
variables that do not appear in the
equations. For example, you can include
z as a solution variable to extend the
previous example to two parallel
intersecting cylinders of radius r. To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
7 and 8 to move the cursor.
The cylinder solutions illustrate how
families of solutions might contain
arbitrary constants of the form ck, where
k is an integer suffix from 1 through 255.
For polynomial systems, computation
time or memory exhaustion may depend
strongly on the order in which you list
solution variables. If your initial choice
exhausts memory or your patience, try
rearranging the variables in the
equations and/or varOrGuess list.
If you do not include any guesses and if
any equation is non-polynomial in any
variable but all equations are linear in
the solution variables, solve() uses
Gaussian elimination to attempt to
determine all real solutions.
If a system is neither polynomial in all of
its variables nor linear in its solution
variables, solve() determines at most one
solution using an approximate iterative
method. To do so, the number of To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
solution variables must equal the 7 and 8 to move the cursor.
number of equations, and all other
variables in the equations must simplify
to numbers.
Each solution variable starts at its
guessed value if there is one; otherwise,
it starts at 0.0.

Alphabetical Listing 175

 solve() Catalogue >
Use guesses to seek additional solutions
one by one. For convergence, a guess
may have to be rather close to a
solution.

SortA Catalogue >

SortA List1[, List2] [, List3]...
SortA Vector1[, Vector2] [, Vector3]...
Sorts the elements of the first argument
in ascending order.
If you include additional arguments,
sorts the elements of each so that their
new positions match the new positions
of the elements in the first argument.
All arguments must be names of lists or
vectors. All arguments must have equal
dimensions.
Empty (void) elements within the first
argument move to the bottom. For more
information on empty elements, see
page 255.

SortD Catalogue >

SortD List1[, List2][, List3]...
SortD Vector1[,Vector2][,Vector3]...
Identical to SortA, except SortD sorts the
elements in descending order.
Empty (void) elements within the first
argument move to the bottom. For more
information on empty elements, see
page 255.

►Sphere Catalogue >

Vector►Sphere Note: To force an approximate result,

176 Alphabetical Listing

►Sphere Catalogue >
Note: You can insert this operator from Handheld: Press / ·.
the computer keyboard by typing Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter.
@>Sphere. Macintosh®: Press “+Enter.
iPad®: Hold enter, and select .
Displays the row or column vector in
spherical form [ρ∠ θ∠ φ].
Vector must be of dimension 3 and can
be either a row or a column vector.
Note: ►Sphere is a display-format
instruction, not a conversion function.
Note: To force an approximate result,
You can use it only at the end of an entry
line. Handheld: Press / ·.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter.
Macintosh®: Press “+Enter.
iPad®: Hold enter, and select .

Press ·

sqrt() Catalogue >

sqrt(Expr1) ⇒ expression

sqrt(List1) ⇒ list

Alphabetical Listing 177

 sqrt() Catalogue >
Returns the square root of the
argument.
For a list, returns the square roots of all
the elements in List1.
Note: See also Square root template,
page 1.

stat.results Catalogue >

stat.results
Displays results from a statistics
calculation.
The results are displayed as a set of
name-value pairs. The specific names
shown are dependent on the most
recently evaluated statistics function or
command.
You can copy a name or value and paste
it into other locations.

Note: Avoid defining variables that use

the same names as those used for
statistical analysis. In some cases, an
error condition could occur. Variable
names used for statistical analysis are
listed in the table below.

stat.a stat.dfDenom stat.MedianY stat.Q3X stat.SSBlock

stat.AdjR² stat.dfBlock stat.MEPred stat.Q3Y stat.SSCol
stat.b stat.dfCol stat.MinX stat.r stat.SSX
stat.b0 stat.dfError stat.MinY stat.r² stat.SSY
stat.b1 stat.dfInteract stat.MS stat.RegEqn stat.SSError
stat.b2 stat.dfReg stat.MSBlock stat.Resid stat.SSInteract
stat.b3 stat.dfNumer stat.MSCol stat.ResidTrans stat.SSReg
stat.b4 stat.dfRow stat.MSError stat.σx stat.SSRow
stat.b5 stat.DW stat.MSInteract stat.σy stat.tList
stat.b6 stat.e stat.MSReg stat.σx1 stat.UpperPred
stat.b7 stat.ExpMatrix stat.MSRow stat.σx2 stat.UpperVal
stat.b8 stat.F stat.n stat.Σx stat.v
stat.b9 stat.FBlock Stat.Ç stat.Σx² stat.v1

178 Alphabetical Listing

stat.b10 stat.Fcol stat.Ç1 stat.Σxy stat.v2
stat.bList stat.FInteract stat.Ç2 stat.Σy stat.vDiff
stat.χ² stat.FreqReg stat.ÇDiff stat.Σy² stat.vList
stat.c stat.Frow stat.PList stat.s stat.XReg
stat.CLower stat.Leverage stat.PVal stat.SE stat.XVal
stat.CLowerList stat.LowerPred stat.PValBlock stat.SEList stat.XValList
stat.CompList stat.LowerVal stat.PValCol stat.SEPred stat.w
stat.CompMatrix stat.m stat.PValInteract stat.sResid stat.y
stat.CookDist stat.MaxX stat.PValRow stat.SEslope
stat.yList
stat.CUpper stat.MaxY stat.Q1X stat.sp
stat.YReg
stat.CUpperList stat.ME stat.Q1Y stat.SS
stat.d stat.MedianX

Note: Each time the Lists & Spreadsheet application calculates statistical results, it
copies the “stat.” group variables to a “stat#.” group, where # is a number that is
incremented automatically. This lets you maintain previous results while performing
multiple calculations.

stat.values Catalogue >

stat.values See the stat.results
example.
Displays a matrix of the values calculated for the
most recently evaluated statistics function or
command.
Unlike stat.results, stat.values omits the names
associated with the values.
You can copy a value and paste it into other locations.

stDevPop() Catalogue >

stDevPop(List [, freqList]) ⇒ In Radian angle and auto modes:
expression
Returns the population standard
deviation of the elements in List.
Each freqList element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of
the corresponding element in List.
Note:List must have at least two
elements. Empty (void) elements are
ignored. For more information on empty
elements, see page 255.

Alphabetical Listing 179

 stDevPop() Catalogue >
stDevPop(Matrix1[, freqMatrix]) ⇒
matrix
Returns a row vector of the population
standard deviations of the columns in
Matrix1.
Each freqMatrix element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of
the corresponding element in Matrix1.
Note:Matrix1must have at least two
rows. Empty (void) elements are
ignored. For more information on empty
elements, see page 255.

stDevSamp() Catalogue >

stDevSamp(List[, freqList]) ⇒
expression
Returns the sample standard deviation
of the elements in List.
Each freqList element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of
the corresponding element in List.
Note:List must have at least two
elements. Empty (void) elements are
ignored. For more information on empty
elements, see page 255.
stDevSamp(Matrix1[, freqMatrix]) ⇒
matrix
Returns a row vector of the sample
standard deviations of the columns in
Matrix1.
Each freqMatrix element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of
the corresponding element in Matrix1.
Note:Matrix1must have at least two
rows. Empty (void) elements are
ignored. For more information on empty
elements, see page 255.

180 Alphabetical Listing

Stop Catalogue >
Stop
Programming command: Terminates the
program.
Stop is not allowed in functions.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

Store See →(store), page 237.

string() Catalogue >

string(Expr) ⇒ string
Simplifies Expr and returns the result as
a character string.

subMat() Catalogue >

subMat(Matrix1[, startRow][, startCol]
[, endRow][, endCol]) ⇒ matrix
Returns the specified submatrix of
Matrix1.
Defaults: startRow=1, startCol=1,
endRow=last row, endCol=last column.

Sum (Sigma) See Σ(), page 228.

Alphabetical Listing 181

 sum() Catalogue >
sum(List[, Start[, End]]) ⇒ expression
Returns the sum of all elements in List.
Start and End are optional. They specify
a range of elements.
Any void argument produces a void
result. Empty (void) elements in List are
ignored. For more information on empty
elements, see page 255.
sum(Matrix1[, Start[, End]]) ⇒ matrix
Returns a row vector containing the
sums of all elements in the columns in
Matrix1.
Start and End are optional. They specify
a range of rows.
Any void argument produces a void
result. Empty (void) elements in Matrix1
are ignored. For more information on
empty elements, see page 255.

sumIf() Catalogue >

sumIf(List,Criteria[, SumList]) ⇒ value
Returns the accumulated sum of all
elements in List that meet the specified
Criteria. Optionally, you can specify an
alternate list, sumList, to supply the
elements to accumulate.
List can be an expression, list, or matrix.
SumList, if specified, must have the
same dimension(s) as List.
Criteria can be:
• A value, expression, or string. For
example, 34 accumulates only those
elements in List that simplify to the
value 34.
• A Boolean expression containing the
symbol ? as a place holder for each
element. For example, ?<10
accumulates only those elements in
List that are less than 10.

182 Alphabetical Listing

sumIf() Catalogue >
When a List element meets the Criteria,
the element is added to the
accumulating sum. If you include
sumList, the corresponding element
from sumList is added to the sum
instead.
Within the Lists & Spreadsheet
application, you can use a range of cells
in place of List and sumList.
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements,
see page 255.
Note: See also countIf(), page 35.

sumSeq() See Σ(), page 228.

system() Catalogue >

system(Eqn1[, Eqn2[, Eqn3[, ...]]])
system(Expr1[, Expr2[, Expr3[, ...]]])
Returns a system of equations,
formatted as a list. You can also create a
system by using a template.
Note: See also System of equations, page
3.

T (transpose) Catalogue >

Matrix1T⇒matrix
Returns the complex conjugate
transpose of Matrix1.
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing @t.

Alphabetical Listing 183

 tan() µ key
tan(Expr1)⇒expression In Degree angle mode:

tan(List1)⇒list
tan(Expr1) returns the tangent of the
argument as an expression.
tan(List1) returns a list of the tangents
of all elements in List1.
Note: The argument is interpreted as a In Gradian angle mode:
degree, gradian or radian angle,
according to the current angle mode.
You can use ¡, G or R to override the
angle mode setting temporarily.

In Radian angle mode:

tan(squareMatrix1)⇒squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix tangent of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the tangent of each element.
For information about the calculation
method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalisable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.

tan/() µ key
tan/(Expr1)⇒expression In Degree angle mode:

tan/(List1)⇒list
tan/(Expr1) returns the angle whose
tangent is Expr1 as an expression.
In Gradian angle mode:
tan/(List1) returns a list of the inverse
tangents of each element of List1.

184 Alphabetical Listing

tan/() µ key
Note: The result is returned as a degree,
gradian or radian angle, according to the
current angle mode setting.
Note: You can insert this function from In Radian angle mode:
the keyboard by typing arctan(...).

tan/(squareMatrix1)⇒squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix inverse tangent of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the inverse tangent of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalisable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.

tangentLine() Catalogue >

tangentLine
(Expr1,Var,Point)⇒expression
tangentLine
(Expr1,Var=Point)⇒expression
Returns the tangent line to the curve
represented by Expr1 at the point
specified in Var=Point.
Make sure that the independent variable
is not defined. For example, If f1(x):=5
and x:=3, then tangentLine(f1(x),x,2)
returns “false.”

tanh() Catalogue >

tanh(Expr1)⇒expression
tanh(List1)⇒list
tanh(Expr1) returns the hyperbolic
tangent of the argument as an
expression.

Alphabetical Listing 185

 tanh() Catalogue >
tanh(List1) returns a list of the
hyperbolic tangents of each element of
List1.
tanh(squareMatrix1)⇒squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix hyperbolic tangent of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the hyperbolic tangent of
each element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalisable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.

tanh/() Catalog >

tanh/(Expr1)⇒expression In Rectangular complex format:

tanh/(List1)⇒list
tanh/(Expr1) returns the inverse
hyperbolic tangent of the argument as
an expression.
tanh/(List1) returns a list of the inverse
hyperbolic tangents of each element of
List1.
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing arctanh(...).
tanh/(squareMatrix1)⇒squareMatrix In Radian angle mode and Rectangular
complex format:
Returns the matrix inverse hyperbolic
tangent of squareMatrix1. This is not
the same as calculating the inverse
hyperbolic tangent of each element. For
information about the calculation
method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalisable.
The result always contains floating-point
To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
numbers.
7 and 8 to move the cursor.

186 Alphabetical Listing

taylor() Catalogue >
taylor(Expr1, Var, Order[,
Point])⇒expression
Returns the requested Taylor
polynomial. The polynomial includes
non-zero terms of integer degrees from
zero through Order in (Var minus
Point). taylor() returns itself if there is no
truncated power series of this order, or if
it would require negative or fractional
exponents. Use substitution and/or
temporary multiplication by a power of
(Var minus Point) to determine more
general power series.
Point defaults to zero and is the
expansion point.

tCdf() Catalogue >

tCdf(lowBound,upBound,df)⇒number if lowBound
and upBound are numbers, list if lowBound and
upBound are lists
Computes the Student-t distribution probability
between lowBound and upBound for the specified
degrees of freedom df.
For P(X { upBound), set lowBound = .ˆ.

tCollect() Catalogue >

tCollect(Expr1)⇒expression
Returns an expression in which products
and integer powers of sines and cosines
are converted to a linear combination of
sines and cosines of multiple angles,
angle sums and angle differences. The
transformation converts trigonometric
polynomials into a linear combination of
their harmonics.

Alphabetical Listing 187

 tCollect() Catalogue >
Sometimes tCollect() will accomplish
your goals when the default
trigonometric simplification does not.
tCollect() tends to reverse
transformations done by tExpand().
Sometimes applying tExpand() to a result
from tCollect(), or vice versa, in two
separate steps simplifies an expression.

tExpand() Catalogue >

tExpand(Expr1)⇒expression
Returns an expression in which sines and
cosines of integer-multiple angles, angle
sums and angle differences are
expanded. Because of the identity (sin
(x))2+(cos(x))2=1, there are many
possible equivalent results.
Consequently, a result might differ from
a result shown in other publications.
Sometimes tExpand() will accomplish
your goals when the default
trigonometric simplification does not.
tExpand() tends to reverse
transformations done by tCollect().
Sometimes applying tCollect() to a result
from tExpand(), or vice versa, in two
separate steps simplifies an expression.
Note: Degree-mode scaling by p/180
interferes with the ability of tExpand() to
recognise expandable forms. For best
results, tExpand() should be used in
Radian mode.

Text Catalogue >

TextpromptString[, DispFlag] Define a programme that
pauses to display each of five
Programming command: Pauses the programme and random numbers in a dialogue
displays the character string promptString in a box.
dialogue box.
When the user selects OK, programme execution
continues.
The optional flag argument can be any expression.

188 Alphabetical Listing

Text Catalogue >
• If DispFlag is omitted or evaluates to 1, the text Within the Prgm...EndPrgm
message is added to the Calculator history. template, complete each line
• If DispFlag evaluates to 0, the text message is not by pressing @ instead of ·.
added to the history. On the computer keyboard,
hold down Alt and press Enter.
If the programme needs a typed response from the
user, refer to Request, page 150, or RequestStr, page
152. Define text_demo()=Prgm
Note: You can use this command within a user- For i,1,5
defined programme but not within a function. strinfo:=”Random number
“ & string(rand(i))
Text strinfo
EndFor
EndPrgm

Run the programme:

text_demo()

Sample of one dialogue box:

Then See If, page 88.

tInterval Catalogue >

tInterval List[,Freq[,CLevel]]
(Data list input)
tInterval v,sx,n[,CLevel]
(Summary stats input)
Computes a t confidence interval. A summary of
results is stored in the stat.results variable (page
178).

Alphabetical Listing 189

 tInterval Catalogue >
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.CLower, Confidence interval for an unknown population mean
stat.CUpper

stat.x Sample mean of the data sequence from the normal random
distribution

stat.ME Margin of error

stat.df Degrees of freedom

stat.sx Sample standard deviation

stat.n Length of the data sequence with sample mean

tInterval_2Samp Catalogue >

tInterval_2Samp List1,List2[,Freq1[,Freq2[,CLevel
[,Pooled]]]]
(Data list input)
tInterval_2Samp v1,sx1,n1,v2,sx2,n2[,CLevel
[,Pooled]]
(Summary stats input)
Computes a two-sample t confidence interval. A
summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable (page 178).
Pooled=1 pools variances; Pooled=0 does not pool
variances.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.CLower, Confidence interval containing confidence level probability of
stat.CUpper distribution

stat.x1-x2 Sample means of the data sequences from the normal random
distribution

stat.ME Margin of error

stat.df Degrees of freedom

190 Alphabetical Listing

Output variable Description
stat.x1, stat.x2 Sample means of the data sequences from the normal random
distribution

stat.sx1, stat.sx2 Sample standard deviations for List 1 and List 2

stat.n1, stat.n2 Number of samples in data sequences

stat.sp The pooled standard deviation. Calculated when Pooled = YES

tmpCnv() Catalogue >

tmpCnv(Expr_¡tempUnit, _¡tempUnit2)
⇒expression _¡tempUnit2
Converts a temperature value specified
by Expr from one unit to another. Valid
temperature units are:
Note: You can use the Catalogue to select
_¡C Celsius temperature units.
_¡F Fahrenheit
_¡K Kelvin
_¡R Rankine
To type ¡, select it from the Catalogue
symbols.

to type _ , press /_.

For example, 100_¡C converts to 212_¡F.
To convert a temperature range, use
@tmpCnv() instead.

@tmpCnv() Catalogue >

@tmpCnv(Expr_¡tempUnit, _
¡tempUnit2) ⇒expression _¡tempUnit2
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing deltaTmpCnv
(...).
Converts a temperature range (the
Note: You can use the Catalogue to select
difference between two temperature
temperature units.
values) specified by Expr from one unit
to another. Valid temperature units are:
_¡C Celsius

Alphabetical Listing 191

 @tmpCnv() Catalogue >
_¡F Fahrenheit
_¡K Kelvin
_¡R Rankine
To enter ¡, select it from the Symbol
Palette or type @d.

To type _ , press /_.

1_¡C and 1_¡K have the same
magnitude, as do 1_¡F and 1_¡R.
However, 1_¡C is 9/5 as large as 1_¡F.
For example, a 100_¡C range (from 0_¡C
to 100_¡C) is equivalent to a 180_¡F
range.
To convert a particular temperature
value instead of a range, use tmpCnv().

tPdf() Catalogue >

tPdf(XVal,df)⇒number if XVal is a number, list if
XVal is a list
Computes the probability density function (pdf) for
the Student-t distribution at a specified x value with
specified degrees of freedom df.

trace() Catalogue >

trace(squareMatrix)⇒expression
Returns the trace (sum of all the
elements on the main diagonal) of
squareMatrix.

192 Alphabetical Listing

Try Catalogue >
Try
block1
Else
block2
EndTry
Executes block1 unless an error occurs.
programme execution transfers to
block2 if an error occurs in block1.
System variable errCode contains the
error code to allow the programme to
perform error recovery. For a list of error
codes, see “Error codes and messages,”
page 265.
block1 and block2 can be either a single
statement or a series of statements
separated with the “:” character.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.
Example 2 Define eigenvals(a,b)=Prgm

To see the commands Try, ClrErr and © programme eigenvals(A,B) displays

PassErr in operation, enter the eigenvals eigenvalues of A·B
() programme shown at the right. Run
Try
the programme by executing each of the
following expressions. Disp "A= ",a

Disp "B= ",b

Disp " "

Disp "Eigenvalues of A·B are:",eigVl(a*b)

Else

If errCode=230 Then
Note: See also ClrErr, page 25, and Disp "Error: Product of A·B must be a
PassErr, page 133. square matrix"

ClrErr

Alphabetical Listing 193

 Try Catalogue >
Else

PassErr

EndIf

EndTry

EndPrgm

tTest Catalogue >

tTest m0,List[,Freq[,Hypoth]]
(Data list input)
tTest m0,x,sx,n,[Hypoth]
(Summary stats input)
Performs a hypothesis test for a single unknown
population mean m when the population standard
deviation s is unknown. A summary of results is
stored in the stat.results variable (page 178).
Test H0: m = m0, against one of the following:

For Ha: m < m0, set Hypoth<0

For Ha: m ƒ m0 (default), set Hypoth=0

For Ha: m > m0, set Hypoth>0

For information on the effect of empty elements in a

list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.t (x N m0) / (stdev / sqrt(n))

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom

stat.x Sample mean of the data sequence in List

stat.sx Sample standard deviation of the data sequence

stat.n Size of the sample

194 Alphabetical Listing

tTest_2Samp Catalogue >
tTest_2Samp List1,List2[,Freq1[,Freq2[,Hypoth
[,Pooled]]]]
(Data list input)
tTest_2Samp v1,sx1,n1,v2,sx2,n2[,Hypoth[,Pooled]]
(Summary stats input)
Computes a two-sample t test. A summary of results
is stored in the stat.results variable (page 178).
Test H0: m1 = m2, against one of the following:

For Ha: m1< m2, set Hypoth<0

For Ha: m1ƒ m2 (default), set Hypoth=0

For Ha: m1> m2, set Hypoth>0

Pooled=1 pools variances

Pooled=0 does not pool variances
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.t Standard normal value computed for the difference of means

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom for the t-statistic

stat.x1, stat.x2 Sample means of the data sequences in List 1 and List 2

stat.sx1, stat.sx2 Sample standard deviations of the data sequences in List 1 and List 2

stat.n1, stat.n2 Size of the samples

stat.sp The pooled standard deviation. Calculated when Pooled=1.

tvmFV() Catalogue >

tvmFV(N,I,PV,Pmt,[PpY],[CpY],
[PmtAt])⇒value
Financial function that calculates the
future value of money.

Alphabetical Listing 195

 tvmFV() Catalogue >
Note: Arguments used in the TVM
functions are described in the table of
TVM arguments, page 197. See also
amortTbl(), page 8.

tvmI() Catalogue >

tvmI(N,PV,Pmt,FV,[PpY],[CpY],
[PmtAt])⇒value
Financial function that calculates the
interest rate per year.
Note: Arguments used in the TVM
functions are described in the table of
TVM arguments, page 197. See also
amortTbl(), page 8.

tvmN() Catalogue >

tvmN(I,PV,Pmt,FV,[PpY],[CpY],
[PmtAt])⇒value
Financial function that calculates the
number of payment periods.
Note: Arguments used in the TVM
functions are described in the table of
TVM arguments, page 197. See also
amortTbl(), page 8.

tvmPmt() Catalogue >

tvmPmt(N,I,PV,FV,[PpY],[CpY],
[PmtAt])⇒value
Financial function that calculates the
amount of each payment.
Note: Arguments used in the TVM
functions are described in the table of
TVM arguments, page 197. See also
amortTbl(), page 8.

196 Alphabetical Listing

 tvmPV() Catalogue >
tvmPV(N,I,Pmt,FV,[PpY],[CpY],
[PmtAt])⇒value
Financial function that calculates the
present value.
Note: Arguments used in the TVM
functions are described in the table of
TVM arguments, page 197. See also
amortTbl(), page 8.

TVM
Description Data type
argument*
N Number of payment periods real number
I Annual interest rate real number
PV Present value real number
Pmt Payment amount real number
FV Future value real number
PpY Payments per year, default=1 integer > 0
CpY Compounding periods per year, default=1 integer > 0
PmtAt Payment due at the end or beginning of each period, integer (0=end,
default=end 1=beginning)

* These time-value-of-money argument names are similar to the TVM variable names
(such as tvm.pv and tvm.pmt) that are used by the Calculator application’s finance
solver.Financial functions, however, do not store their argument values or results to
the TVM variables.

TwoVar Catalogue >

TwoVar X, Y[, [Freq] [, Category, Include]]
Calculates the TwoVar statistics. A summary of results
is stored in the stat.results variable (page 178).
All the lists must have equal dimension except for
Include.
X and Y are lists of independent and dependent
variables.

Alphabetical Listing 197

 TwoVar Catalogue >
Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each
element in Freq specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data
point. The default value is 1. All elements must be
integers | 0.
Category is a list of numeric category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Only those data items whose category code is
included in this list are included in the calculation.
An empty (void) element in any of the lists X, Freq,
or Category results in a void for the corresponding
element of all those lists. An empty element in any of
the lists X1 through X20 results in a void for the
corresponding element of all those lists. For more
information on empty elements, see page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.v Mean of x values

stat.Gx Sum of x values

stat.Gx2 Sum of x2 values

stat.sx Sample standard deviation of x

stat.sx Population standard deviation of x

stat.n Number of data points

stat.w Mean of y values

stat.Gy Sum of y values

stat.Gy2 Sum of y2 values

stat.sy Sample standard deviation of y

stat.sy Population standard deviation of y

stat.Gxy Sum of x·y values

stat.r Correlation coefficient

stat.MinX Minimum of x values

stat.Q1X 1st Quartile of x

stat.MedianX Median of x

198 Alphabetical Listing

Output variable Description
stat.Q3X 3rd Quartile of x

stat.MaxX Maximum of x values

stat.MinY Minimum of y values

stat.Q1Y 1st Quartile of y

stat.MedY Median of y

stat.Q3Y 3rd Quartile of y

stat.MaxY Maximum of y values

stat.G(x-v)2 Sum of squares of deviations from the mean of x

stat.G(y-w)2 Sum of squares of deviations from the mean of y

unitV() Catalogue >

unitV(Vector1)⇒vector
Returns either a row- or column-unit
vector, depending on the form of
Vector1.
Vector1 must be either a single-row
matrix or a single-column matrix.

To see the entire result, press 5 and then use

7 and 8 to move the cursor.

Alphabetical Listing 199

 unLock Catalogue >
unLock Var1[, Var2] [, Var3] ...
unLock Var.
Unlocks the specified variables or
variable group. Locked variables cannot
be modified or deleted.
See Lock, page 107, and getLockInfo(),
page 84.

varPop() Catalogue >

varPop(List[, freqList])⇒expression
Returns the population variance of List.
Each freqList element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of
the corresponding element in List.
Note: List must contain at least two
elements.
If an element in either list is empty
(void), that element is ignored, and the
corresponding element in the other list is
also ignored. For more information on
empty elements, see page 255.

varSamp() Catalogue >

varSamp(List[, freqList])⇒expression
Returns the sample variance of List.
Each freqList element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of
the corresponding element in List.
Note: List must contain at least two
elements.

200 Alphabetical Listing

varSamp() Catalogue >
If an element in either list is empty
(void), that element is ignored, and the
corresponding element in the other list is
also ignored. For more information on
empty elements, see page 255.
varSamp(Matrix1[,
freqMatrix])⇒matrix
Returns a row vector containing the
sample variance of each column in
Matrix1.
Each freqMatrix element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of
the corresponding element in Matrix1.
If an element in either matrix is empty
(void), that element is ignored, and the
corresponding element in the other
matrix is also ignored. For more
information on empty elements, see
page 255.
Note: Matrix1 must contain at least two
rows.

Wait Catalogue >

Wait timeInSeconds To wait 4 seconds:
Wait 4
Suspends execution for a period of
timeInSeconds seconds.
To wait 1/2 second:
Wait is particularly useful in a programme Wait 0.5
that needs a brief delay to allow requested
data to become available.
To wait 1.3 seconds using the variable
The argument timeInSeconds must be an seccount:
expression that simplifies to a decimal value seccount:=1.3
in the range 0 through 100. The command Wait seccount
rounds this value up to the nearest 0.1
seconds.
This example switches a green LED on for
To cancel a Wait that is in progress, 0.5 seconds and then switches it off.
Send “SET GREEN 1 ON”
• Handheld: Hold down the c key and Wait 0.5
press · repeatedly. Send “SET GREEN 1 OFF”

Alphabetical Listing 201

 Wait Catalogue >
• Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and
press Enter repeatedly.
• Macintosh®: Hold down the F5 key and
press Enter repeatedly.
• iPad®: The app displays a prompt. You can
continue waiting or cancel.
Note: You can use the Wait command within
a user-defined programme but not within a
function.

warnCodes () Catalogue >

warnCodes(Expr1,
StatusVar)⇒expression
Evaluates expression Expr1, returns the
result and stores the codes of any
generated warnings in the StatusVar list
variable. If no warnings are generated,
this function assigns StatusVar an empty To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
list. 7 and 8 to move the cursor.

Expr1 can be any valid TI-Nspire™ or

TI-Nspire™ CAS maths expression. You
cannot use a command or assignment as
Expr1.
StatusVar must be a valid variable name.
For a list of warning codes and associated
messages, see page 273.

when() Catalogue >

when(Condition, trueResult [,
falseResult][, unknownResult])
⇒expression
Returns trueResult, falseResult, or
unknownResult, depending on whether
Condition is true, false, or unknown.
Returns the input if there are too few
arguments to specify the appropriate
result.

202 Alphabetical Listing

when() Catalogue >
Omit both falseResult and
unknownResult to make an expression
defined only in the region where
Condition is true.
Use an undef falseResult to define an
expression that graphs only on an
interval.
when() is helpful for defining recursive
functions.

While Catalogue >

While Condition
Block
EndWhile
Executes the statements in Block as long
as Condition is true.
Block can be either a single statement or
a sequence of statements separated
with the “:” character.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

xor Catalogue >

BooleanExpr1xorBooleanExpr2 returns
Boolean expression
BooleanList1xorBooleanList2 returns
Boolean list
BooleanMatrix1xorBooleanMatrix2
returns Boolean matrix

Alphabetical Listing 203

 xor Catalogue >
Returns true if BooleanExpr1 is true and
BooleanExpr2 is false, or vice versa.
Returns false if both arguments are true
or if both are false. Returns a simplified
Boolean expression if either of the
arguments cannot be resolved to true or
false.
Note: See or, page 130.
Integer1 xor Integer2 ⇒ integer In Hex base mode:

Compares two real integers bit-by-bit Important: Zero, not the letter O.
using an xor operation. Internally, both
integers are converted to signed, 64-bit
binary numbers. When corresponding
bits are compared, the result is 1 if
either bit (but not both) is 1; the result is In Bin base mode:
0 if both bits are 0 or both bits are 1. The
returned value represents the bit results
and is displayed according to the Base
mode. Note: A binary entry can have up to 64 digits
(not counting the 0b prefix). A hexadecimal
You can enter the integers in any entry can have up to 16 digits.
number base. For a binary or
hexadecimal entry, you must use the 0b
or 0h prefix, respectively. Without a
prefix, integers are treated as decimal
(base 10).
If you enter a decimal integer that is too
large for a signed, 64-bit binary form, a
symmetric modulo operation is used to
bring the value into the appropriate
range. For more information, see 4Base2,
page 17.
Note: See or, page 130.

zeroes() Catalogue >

zeroes(Expr, Var)⇒list
zeroes(Expr, Var=Guess)⇒list

204 Alphabetical Listing

zeroes() Catalogue >
Returns a list of candidate real values of
Var that make Expr=0. zeroes() does this
by computing exp4list(solve
(Expr=0,Var),Var).
For some purposes, the result form for
zeroes() is more convenient than that of
solve(). However, the result form of
zeroes() cannot express implicit
solutions, solutions that require
inequalities, or solutions that do not
involve Var.
Note: See also cSolve(), cZeroes() and
solve().
zeroes({Expr1, Expr2}, {VarOrGuess1,
VarOrGuess2 [, … ]})⇒matrix
Returns candidate real zeroes of the
simultaneous algebraic expressions,
where each VarOrGuess specifies an
unknown whose value you seek.
Optionally, you can specify an initial
guess for a variable. Each VarOrGuess
must have the form:
variable
– or –
variable = real or non-real number
For example, x is valid and so is x=3.
If all of the expressions are polynomials
and if you do NOT specify any initial
guesses, zeroes() uses the lexical
Gröbner/Buchberger elimination method
to attempt to determine all real zeroes.
For example, suppose you have a circle
of radius r at the origin and another
circle of radius r centred where the first
circle crosses the positive x-axis. Use
zeroes() to find the intersections.

Alphabetical Listing 205

 zeroes() Catalogue >
As illustrated by r in the example to the
right, simultaneous polynomial
expressions can have extra variables that
have no values, but represent given
numeric values that could be substituted
later.
Each row of the resulting matrix
represents an alternate zero, with the
components ordered the same as the Extract row 2:
varOrGuess list. To extract a row, index
the matrix by [row].

You can also (or instead) include

unknowns that do not appear in the
expressions. For example, you can
include z as an unknown to extend the
previous example to two parallel
intersecting cylinders of radius r. The
cylinder zeroes illustrate how families of
zeroes might contain arbitrary constants
in the form ck, where k is an integer
suffix from 1 through 255.
For polynomial systems, computation
time or memory exhaustion may depend
strongly on the order in which you list
unknowns. If your initial choice exhausts
memory or your patience, try
rearranging the variables in the
expressions and/or varOrGuess list.
If you do not include any guesses and if
any expression is non-polynomial in any
variable but all expressions are linear in
the unknowns, zeroes() uses Gaussian
elimination to attempt to determine all
real zeroes.
If a system is neither polynomial in all of
its variables nor linear in its unknowns,
zeroes() determines at most one zero
using an approximate iterative method.
To do so, the number of unknowns must
equal the number of expressions, and all
other variables in the expressions must
simplify to numbers.

206 Alphabetical Listing

zeroes() Catalogue >
Each unknown starts at its guessed value
if there is one; otherwise, it starts at 0.0.
Use guesses to seek additional zeroes
one by one. For convergence, a guess
may have to be rather close to a zero.

zInterval Catalogue >

zInterval s,List[,Freq[,CLevel]]
(Data list input)
zInterval s,v,n [,CLevel]
(Summary stats input)
Computes a z confidence interval. A summary of
results is stored in the stat.results variable (page
178).
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.CLower, Confidence interval for an unknown population mean
stat.CUpper

stat.x Sample mean of the data sequence from the normal random
distribution

stat.ME Margin of error

stat.sx Sample standard deviation

stat.n Length of the data sequence with sample mean

stat.s Known population standard deviation for data sequence List

zInterval_1Prop Catalogue >

zInterval_1Prop x,n [,CLevel]
Computes a one-proportion z confidence interval. A
summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable (page 178).
x is a non-negative integer.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Alphabetical Listing 207

Output variable Description
stat.CLower, Confidence interval containing confidence level probability of
stat.CUpper distribution

stat.Ç The calculated proportion of successes

stat.ME Margin of error

stat.n Number of samples in data sequence

zInterval_2Prop Catalogue >

zInterval_2Prop x1,n1,x2,n2[,CLevel]
Computes a two-proportion z confidence interval. A
summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable (page 178).
x1 and x2 are non-negative integers.
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.CLower, Confidence interval containing confidence level probability of
stat.CUpper distribution

stat.Ç Diff The calculated difference between proportions

stat.ME Margin of error

stat.Ç1 First sample proportion estimate

stat.Ç2 Second sample proportion estimate

stat.n1 Sample size in data sequence one

stat.n2 Sample size in data sequence two

zInterval_2Samp Catalogue >

zInterval_2Samp s1,s2 ,List1,List2[,Freq1[,Freq2,
[CLevel]]]
(Data list input)
zInterval_2Samp s1,s2,v1,n1,v2,n2[,CLevel]

(Summary stats input)

208 Alphabetical Listing

zInterval_2Samp Catalogue >
Computes a two-sample z confidence interval. A
summary of results is stored in the stat.results
variable (page 178).
For information on the effect of empty elements in a
list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.CLower, Confidence interval containing confidence level probability of
stat.CUpper distribution

stat.x1-x2 Sample means of the data sequences from the normal random
distribution

stat.ME Margin of error

stat.x1, stat.x2 Sample means of the data sequences from the normal random
distribution

stat.sx1, stat.sx2 Sample standard deviations for List 1 and List 2

stat.n1, stat.n2 Number of samples in data sequences

stat.r1, stat.r2 Known population standard deviations for data sequence List 1 and
List 2

zTest Catalogue >

zTest m0,s,List,[Freq[,Hypoth]]
(Data list input)
zTest m0,s,v,n[,Hypoth]
(Summary stats input)
Performs a z test with frequency freqlist. A summary
of results is stored in the stat.results variable (page
178).
Test H0: m = m0, against one of the following:

For Ha: m < m0, set Hypoth<0

For Ha: m ƒ m0 (default), set Hypoth=0

For Ha: m > m0, set Hypoth>0

For information on the effect of empty elements in a

list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Alphabetical Listing 209

Output
Description
variable
stat.z (x N m0) / (s / sqrt(n))

stat.P Value Least probability at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.x Sample mean of the data sequence in List

stat.sx Sample standard deviation of the data sequence. Only returned for Data
input.

stat.n Size of the sample

zTest_1Prop Catalogue >

zTest_1Prop p0,x,n[,Hypoth]
Computes a one-proportion z test. A summary of
results is stored in the stat.results variable (page
178).
x is a non-negative integer.
Test H0: p = p0 against one of the following:

For Ha: p > p0, set Hypoth>0

For Ha: p ƒ p0 (default), set Hypoth=0

For Ha: p < p0, set Hypoth<0

For information on the effect of empty elements in a

list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.p0 Hypothesized population proportion

stat.z Standard normal value computed for the proportion

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.Ç Estimated sample proportion

stat.n Size of the sample

zTest_2Prop Catalogue >

zTest_2Prop x1,n1,x2,n2[,Hypoth]

210 Alphabetical Listing

zTest_2Prop Catalogue >
Computes a two-proportion z test. A summary of
results is stored in the stat.results variable (page
178).
x1 and x2 are non-negative integers.
Test H0: p1 = p2, against one of the following:

For Ha: p1 > p2, set Hypoth>0

For Ha: p1 ƒ p2 (default), set Hypoth=0

For Ha: p < p0, set Hypoth<0

For information on the effect of empty elements in a

list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.z Standard normal value computed for the difference of proportions

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.Ç1 First sample proportion estimate

stat.Ç2 Second sample proportion estimate

stat.Ç Pooled sample proportion estimate

stat.n1, stat.n2 Number of samples taken in trials 1 and 2

zTest_2Samp Catalogue >

zTest_2Samp s1,s2 ,List1,List2[,Freq1[,Freq2
[,Hypoth]]]
(Data list input)

zTest_2Samp s1,s2,v1,n1,v2,n2[,Hypoth]

(Summary stats input)

Computes a two-sample z test. A summary of results
is stored in the stat.results variable (page 178).
Test H0: m1 = m2, against one of the following:

For Ha: m1 < m2, set Hypoth<0

For Ha: m1 ƒ m2 (default), set Hypoth=0

Alphabetical Listing 211

 zTest_2Samp Catalogue >
For Ha: m1 > m2, Hypoth>0

For information on the effect of empty elements in a

list, see “Empty (Void) Elements”, page 255.

Output variable Description

stat.z Standard normal value computed for the difference of means

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.x1, stat.x2 Sample means of the data sequences in List1 and List2

stat.sx1, stat.sx2 Sample standard deviations of the data sequences in List1 and List2

stat.n1, stat.n2 Size of the samples

212 Alphabetical Listing

Symbols

+ (add) + key
Expr1 + Expr2 ⇒ expression
Returns the sum of the two arguments.

List1 + List2 ⇒ list

Matrix1 + Matrix2 ⇒ matrix
Returns a list (or matrix) containing the
sums of corresponding elements in List1
and List2 (or Matrix1 and Matrix2).
Dimensions of the arguments must be
equal.

Expr + List1 ⇒ list

List1 + Expr ⇒ list
Returns a list containing the sums of
Expr and each element in List1.
Expr + Matrix1 ⇒ matrix
Matrix1 + Expr ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix with Expr added to
each element on the diagonal of
Matrix1. Matrix1 must be square.
Note: Use .+ (dot plus) to add an
expression to each element.

− (subtract) - key
Expr1 − Expr2 ⇒ expression
Returns Expr1 minus Expr2.

List1 −List2⇒ list

Matrix1 −Matrix2 ⇒ matrix

Symbols 213
 − (subtract) - key
Subtracts each element in List2 (or
Matrix2) from the corresponding
element in List1 (or Matrix1), and
returns the results.
Dimensions of the arguments must be
equal.
Expr − List1 ⇒ list
List1 − Expr ⇒ list
Subtracts each List1 element from Expr
or subtracts Expr from each List1
element, and returns a list of the results.
Expr − Matrix1 ⇒ matrix
Matrix1 − Expr ⇒ matrix
Expr − Matrix1 returns a matrix of Expr
times the identity matrix minus
Matrix1. Matrix1 must be square.
Matrix1 − Expr returns a matrix of Expr
times the identity matrix subtracted
from Matrix1. Matrix1 must be square.
Note: Use .− (dot minus) to subtract an
expression from each element.

•(multiply) r key
Expr1•Expr2 ⇒ expression
Returns the product of the two
arguments.
List1•List2 ⇒ list
Returns a list containing the products of
the corresponding elements in List1 and
List2.
Dimensions of the lists must be equal.
Matrix1•Matrix2 ⇒ matrix
Returns the matrix product of Matrix1
and Matrix2.
The number of columns in Matrix1 must
equal the number of rows in Matrix2.

214 Symbols
•(multiply) r key
Expr •List1 ⇒ list
List1•Expr ⇒ list
Returns a list containing the products of
Expr and each element in List1.

Expr •Matrix1 ⇒ matrix

Matrix1•Expr ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix containing the products
of Expr and each element in Matrix1.

Note: Use .•(dot multiply) to multiply an

expression by each element.

⁄ (divide) p key
Expr1 ⁄ Expr2 ⇒ expression
Returns the quotient of Expr1 divided by
Expr2.
Note: See also Fraction template, page 1.
List1 ⁄ List2 ⇒ list
Returns a list containing the quotients of
List1 divided by List2.
Dimensions of the lists must be equal.
Expr ⁄ List1 ⇒ list
List1 ⁄ Expr ⇒ list
Returns a list containing the quotients of
Expr divided by List1 orList1 divided by
Expr.
Matrix1 ⁄ Expr ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix containing the
quotients of Matrix1 ⁄ Expr.

Matrix1 ⁄ Value ⇒ matrix

Symbols 215
 ⁄ (divide) p key
Note: Use . ⁄ (dot divide) to divide an
expression by each element.

^ (power) l key
Expr1 ^ Expr2⇒ expression
List1 ^ List2 ⇒ list

Returns the first argument raised to the

power of the second argument.
Note: See also Exponent template, page
1.
For a list, returns the elements in List1
raised to the power of the corresponding
elements in List2.
In the real domain, fractional powers
that have reduced exponents with odd
denominators use the real branch versus
the principal branch for complex mode.
Expr ^ List1 ⇒ list
Returns Expr raised to the power of the
elements in List1.
List1 ^ Expr ⇒ list
Returns the elements in List1 raised to
the power of Expr.
squareMatrix1 ^ integer ⇒ matrix
Returns squareMatrix1 raised to the
integer power.
squareMatrix1 must be a square matrix.
If integer = −1, computes the inverse
matrix.
If integer < −1, computes the inverse
matrix to an appropriate positive power.

216 Symbols
x2 (square) q key
Expr12⇒ expression
Returns the square of the argument.
List12 ⇒ list

Returns a list containing the squares of

the elements in List1.
squareMatrix12 ⇒ matrix

Returns the matrix square of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the square of each element.
Use .^2 to calculate the square of each
element.

.+ (dot add) ^+ keys

Matrix1 .+ Matrix2 ⇒ matrix
Expr .+ Matrix1⇒ matrix
Matrix1.+Matrix2 returns a matrix that
is the sum of each pair of corresponding
elements in Matrix1 and Matrix2.
Expr .+ Matrix1 returns a matrix that is
the sum of Expr and each element in
Matrix1.

.- (dot subt.) ^- keys

Matrix1 .− Matrix2⇒ matrix
Expr .− Matrix1 ⇒ matrix
Matrix1.− Matrix2 returns a matrix that
is the difference between each pair of
corresponding elements in Matrix1 and
Matrix2.
Expr .− Matrix1 returns a matrix that is
the difference of Expr and each element
in Matrix1.
.

Symbols 217
 .•(dot mult.) ^r keys
Matrix1 .• Matrix2⇒ matrix
Expr .• Matrix1 ⇒ matrix
Matrix1.• Matrix2 returns a matrix that
is the product of each pair of
corresponding elements in Matrix1 and
Matrix2.
Expr .• Matrix1 returns a matrix
containing the products of Expr and
each element in Matrix1.

. ⁄ (dot divide) ^p keys

Matrix1. ⁄ Matrix2 ⇒ matrix
Expr . ⁄ Matrix1⇒ matrix
Matrix1 . ⁄ Matrix2 returns a matrix that
is the quotient of each pair of
corresponding elements in Matrix1 and
Matrix2.
Expr . ⁄ Matrix1 returns a matrix that is
the quotient of Expr and each element
in Matrix1.

.^ (dot power) ^l keys

Matrix1 .^ Matrix2 ⇒ matrix
Expr . ^ Matrix1⇒ matrix
Matrix1.^ Matrix2 returns a matrix
where each element in Matrix2 is the
exponent for the corresponding element
in Matrix1.
Expr .^ Matrix1 returns a matrix where
each element in Matrix1 is the exponent
for Expr.

218 Symbols
− (negate) v key
−Expr1 ⇒ expression
−List1 ⇒ list
−Matrix1 ⇒ matrix
Returns the negation of the argument.
In Bin base mode:
For a list or matrix, returns all the
elements negated. Important: Zero, not the letter O.

If the argument is a binary or

hexadecimal integer, the negation gives
the two’s complement.
To see the entire result, press 5 and then use
7 and 8 to move the cursor.

% (percent) /k keys
Expr1% ⇒ expression Note: To force an approximate result,

List1% ⇒ list Handheld: Press / ·.

Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter.
Matrix1% ⇒ matrix Macintosh®: Press “+Enter.
iPad®: Hold enter, and select .

Returns
For a list or matrix, returns a list or
matrix with each element divided by
100.

= (equal) = key
Expr1=Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression Example function that uses maths test
symbols: =, ≠, <, ≤, >, ≥
List1=List2 ⇒ Boolean list
Matrix1=Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix
Returns true if Expr1 is determined to
be equal to Expr2.
Returns false if Expr1 is determined to
not be equal to Expr2.

Symbols 219
 = (equal) = key
Anything else returns a simplified form
of the equation.
For lists and matrices, returns
comparisons element by element.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

Result of graphing g(x)

≠ (not equal) /= keys

Expr1≠Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example.

List1≠List2 ⇒ Boolean list

Matrix1≠Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix
Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be not equal
to Expr2.
Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be equal to
Expr2.
Anything else returns a simplified form of the
equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons element
by element.

220 Symbols
≠ (not equal) /= keys
Note: You can insert this operator from the keyboard
by typing /=

< (less than) /= keys

Expr1<Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example.

List1<List2 ⇒ Boolean list

Matrix1<Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix
Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be less than
Expr2.
Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be greater
than or equal to Expr2.
Anything else returns a simplified form of the
equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons element
by element.

≤ (less or equal) /= keys

Expr1≤Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example.

List1≤List2 ⇒ Boolean list

Matrix1 ≤Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix
Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be less than or
equal to Expr2.
Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be greater
than Expr2.
Anything else returns a simplified form of the
equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons element
by element.
Note: You can insert this operator from the keyboard
by typing <=

Symbols 221
 > (greater than) /= keys
Expr1>Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example.

List1>List2 ⇒ Boolean list

Matrix1>Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix
Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be greater
than Expr2.
Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be less than
or equal to Expr2.
Anything else returns a simplified form of the
equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons element
by element.

≥ (greater or equal) /= keys

Expr1≥Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example.

List1≥List2 ⇒ Boolean list

Matrix1 ≥Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix
Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be greater
than or equal to Expr2.
Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be less than
Expr2.
Anything else returns a simplified form of the
equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons element
by element.
Note: You can insert this operator from the keyboard
by typing >=

222 Symbols
⇒ (logical implication) /= keys
BooleanExpr1 ⇒ BooleanExpr2
returns Boolean expression
BooleanList1 ⇒ BooleanList2 returns
Boolean list
BooleanMatrix1 ⇒ BooleanMatrix2
returns Boolean matrix
Integer1 ⇒ Integer2 returns Integer
Evaluates the expression not
<argument1> or <argument2> and
returns true, false, or a simplified form
of the equation.
For lists and matrices, returns
comparisons element by element.
Note: You can insert this operator from
the keyboard by typing =>

⇔ (logical double implication,

XNOR) /= keys
BooleanExpr1 ⇔ BooleanExpr2
returns Boolean expression
BooleanList1 ⇔ BooleanList2 returns
Boolean list
BooleanMatrix1 ⇔ BooleanMatrix2
returns Boolean matrix
Integer1 ⇔ Integer2 returns Integer
Returns the negation of an XOR Boolean
operation on the two arguments.
Returns true, false, or a simplified form
of the equation.
For lists and matrices, returns
comparisons element by element.
Note: You can insert this operator from
the keyboard by typing <=>

Symbols 223
 ! (factorial) º key
Expr1! ⇒ expression
List1! ⇒ list
Matrix1! ⇒ matrix
Returns the factorial of the argument.
For a list or matrix, returns a list or
matrix of factorials of the elements.

& (append) /k keys

String1 & String2 ⇒ string
Returns a text string that is String2
appended to String1.

d() (derivative) Catalogue >

d(Expr1, Var[, Order]) ⇒ expression
d(List1, Var[, Order]) ⇒ list
d(Matrix1,Var[, Order]) ⇒ matrix
Returns the first derivative of the first
argument with respect to variable Var.
Order, if included, must be an integer. If
the order is less than zero, the result will
be an anti-derivative.
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing derivative
(...).
d() does not follow the normal
evaluation mechanism of fully
simplifying its arguments and then
applying the function definition to these
fully simplified arguments. Instead, d()
performs the following steps:
1. Simplify the second argument only to
the extent that it does not lead to a
non-variable.
2. Simplify the first argument only to
the extent that it does recall any

224 Symbols
d() (derivative) Catalogue >
stored value for the variable
determined by step 1.
3. Determine the symbolic derivative of
the result of step 2 with respect to
the variable from step 1.
If the variable from step 1 has a stored
value or a value specified by the
constraint (“|”) operator, substitute that
value into the result from step 3.
Note: See also First derivative, page 5;
Second derivative, page 6; or
Nth derivative, page 6.

∫() (integral) Catalogue >

∫(Expr1, Var[,Lower,Upper]) ⇒
expression
∫(Expr1,Var[,Constant]) ⇒ expression
Returns the integral of Expr1 with
respect to the variable Var from Lower
to Upper.
Note: See also Definite or Indefinite
integral template, page 6.
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing integral(...).
If Lower and Upper are omitted, returns
an anti-derivative. A symbolic constant
of integration is omitted unless you
provide the Constant argument.

Equally valid anti-derivatives might differ

by a numeric constant. Such a constant
might be disguised—particularly when
an anti-derivative contains logarithms or
inverse trigonometric functions.
Moreover, piecewise constant
expressions are sometimes added to
make an anti-derivative valid over a
larger interval than the usual formula.

Symbols 225
 ∫() (integral) Catalogue >
∫() returns itself for pieces of Expr1 that
it cannot determine as an explicit finite
combination of its built-in functions and
operators.
When you provide Lower and Upper, an
attempt is made to locate any
discontinuities or discontinuous
derivatives in the interval Lower < Var <
Upper and to subdivide the interval at
those places.
For the Auto setting of the Auto or
Approximate mode, numerical
integration is used where applicable
when an anti-derivative or a limit cannot
be determined.
For the Approximate setting, numerical Note: To force an approximate result,
integration is tried first, if applicable.
Anti-derivatives are sought only where Handheld: Press / ·.
such numerical integration is Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter.
inapplicable or fails. Macintosh®: Press “+Enter.
iPad®: Hold enter, and select .

∫() can be nested to do multiple integrals.

Integration limits can depend on
integration variables outside them.
Note: See also nInt(), page 123.

√() (square root) /q keys

√(Expr1) ⇒ expression
√(List1) ⇒ list

Returns the square root of the

argument.
For a list, returns the square roots of all
the elements in List1.

226 Symbols
√() (square root) /q keys
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing sqrt(...)
Note: See also Square root template,
page 1.

Π() (prodSeq) Catalogue >

Π(Expr1, Var, Low, High) ⇒
expression
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing prodSeq(...).
Evaluates Expr1 for each value of Var
from Low to High, and returns the
product of the results.
Note: See also Product template (Π),
page 5.

Π(Expr1, Var, Low, Low−1) ⇒ 1

Π(Expr1, Var, Low, High) ⇒ 1/Π
(Expr1, Var, High+1, Low−1) if High <
Low−1

The product formulas used are derived

from the following reference:
Ronald L. Graham, Donald E. Knuth, and
Oren Patashnik. Concrete Mathematics:
A Foundation for Computer Science.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-
Wesley, 1994.

Symbols 227
 Σ() (sumSeq) Catalogue >
Σ(Expr1, Var, Low, High) ⇒
expression
Note: You can insert this function from
the keyboard by typing sumSeq(...).
Evaluates Expr1 for each value of Var
from Low to High, and returns the sum
of the results.
Note: See also Sum template, page 5.

Σ(Expr1, Var, Low, Low−1) ⇒ 0

Σ(Expr1, Var, Low, High) ⇒ μ
Σ(Expr1, Var, High+1, Low−1) if High
< Low−1

The summation formulas used are

derived from the following reference:
Ronald L. Graham, Donald E. Knuth, and
Oren Patashnik. Concrete Mathematics:
A Foundation for Computer Science.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-
Wesley, 1994.

ΣInt() Catalogue >

ΣInt(NPmt1, NPmt2, N, I, PV ,[Pmt],
[FV], [PpY], [CpY], [PmtAt],
[roundValue]) ⇒ value
ΣInt(NPmt1,NPmt2,amortTable) ⇒
value
Amortization function that calculates the
sum of the interest during a specified
range of payments.
NPmt1 and NPmt2 define the start and
end boundaries of the payment range.
N, I, PV, Pmt, FV, PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 197.

228 Symbols
ΣInt() Catalogue >
• If you omit Pmt, it defaults to
Pmt=tvmPmt
(N,I,PV,FV,PpY,CpY,PmtAt).
• If you omit FV, it defaults to FV=0.
• The defaults for PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are the same as for the TVM functions.
roundValue specifies the number of
decimal places for rounding. Default=2.
ΣInt(NPmt1,NPmt2,amortTable)
calculates the sum of the interest based
on amortization table amortTable. The
amortTable argument must be a matrix
in the form described under amortTbl(),
page 8.
Note: See also ΣPrn(), below, and Bal(),
page 17.

ΣPrn() Catalogue >

ΣPrn(NPmt1, NPmt2, N, I, PV, [Pmt],
[FV], [PpY], [CpY], [PmtAt],
[roundValue]) ⇒ value
ΣPrn(NPmt1, NPmt2, amortTable) ⇒
value
Amortization function that calculates the
sum of the principal during a specified
range of payments.
NPmt1 and NPmt2 define the start and
end boundaries of the payment range.
N, I, PV, Pmt, FV, PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 197.
• If you omit Pmt, it defaults to
Pmt=tvmPmt
(N,I,PV,FV,PpY,CpY,PmtAt).
• If you omit FV, it defaults to FV=0.
• The defaults for PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are the same as for the TVM functions.
roundValue specifies the number of
decimal places for rounding. Default=2.

Symbols 229
 ΣPrn() Catalogue >
ΣPrn(NPmt1,NPmt2,amortTable)
calculates the sum of the principal paid
based on amortization table
amortTable. The amortTable argument
must be a matrix in the form described
under amortTbl(), page 8.
Note: See also ΣInt(), above, and Bal(),
page 17.

# (indirection) /k keys
# varNameString
Refers to the variable whose name is
Creates or refers to the variable xyz .
varNameString. This lets you use strings
to create variable names from within a
function.

Returns the value of the variable (r) whose

name is stored in variable s1.

E (scientific notation) i key

mantissaEexponent
Enters a number in scientific notation.
The number is interpreted as
mantissa × 10exponent.
Hint: If you want to enter a power of 10
without causing a decimal value result,
use 10^integer.
Note: You can insert this operator from
the computer keyboard by typing @E. for
example, type 2.3@E4 to enter 2.3E4.

g (gradian)
1 key
Expr1g ⇒ expression In Degree, Gradian or Radian mode:

List1g ⇒ list

230 Symbols
g (gradian)
1 key
Matrix1g ⇒ matrix

This function gives you a way to specify a

gradian angle while in the Degree or
Radian mode.
In Radian angle mode, multiplies Expr1
by π/200.
In Degree angle mode, multiplies Expr1
by g/100.
In Gradian mode, returns Expr1
unchanged.
Note: You can insert this symbol from
the computer keyboard by typing @g.

r(radian)
1 key
Expr1r ⇒ expression In Degree, Gradian or Radian angle mode:

List1r ⇒ list

Matrix1r ⇒ matrix

This function gives you a way to specify a

radian angle while in Degree or Gradian
mode.
In Degree angle mode, multiplies the
argument by 180/π.
In Radian angle mode, returns the
argument unchanged.
In Gradian mode, multiplies the
argument by 200/π.
Hint: Use r if you want to force radians in
a function definition regardless of the
mode that prevails when the function is
used.
Note: You can insert this symbol from
the computer keyboard by typing @r.

Symbols 231
 ° (degree) 1 key
Expr1° ⇒ expression In Degree, Gradian or Radian angle mode:

List1° ⇒ list
Matrix1° ⇒ matrix
This function gives you a way to specify a In Radian angle mode:
degree angle while in Gradian or Radian Note: To force an approximate result,
mode.
Handheld: Press / ·.
In Radian angle mode, multiplies the
Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter.
argument by π/180.
Macintosh®: Press “+Enter.
In Degree angle mode, returns the iPad®: Hold enter, and select .
argument unchanged.
In Gradian angle mode, multiplies the
argument by 10/9.
Note: You can insert this symbol from
the computer keyboard by typing @d.

°, ', '' (degree/minute/second) /k keys

dd°mm'ss.ss'' ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

dd A positive or negative number

mm A non-negative number
ss.ss A non-negative number
Returns dd+(mm/60)+(ss.ss/3600).
This base-60 entry format lets you:
• Enter an angle in
degrees/minutes/seconds without
regard to the current angle mode.
• Enter time as hours/minutes/seconds.
Note: Follow ss. with two apostrophes
(''), not a quote symbol (").

∠ (angle) /k keys
[Radius,∠ θ_Angle] ⇒ vector In Radian mode and vector format set to:
(polar input) rectangular

[Radius,∠ θ_Angle,Z_Coordinate] ⇒
vector
(cylindrical input)

232 Symbols
∠ (angle) /k keys
[Radius,∠ θ_Angle,∠ θ_Angle] ⇒
vector cylindrical
(spherical input)
Returns coordinates as a vector
depending on the Vector Format mode
setting: rectangular, cylindrical, or
spherical.
spherical
Note: You can insert this symbol from
the computer keyboard by typing @<.

(Magnitude∠ Angle) ⇒ complexValue In Radian angle mode and Rectangular

(polar input) complex format:

Enters a complex value in (r∠ θ) polar

form. The Angle is interpreted according
to the current Angle mode setting.
Note: To force an approximate result,

Handheld: Press / ·.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter.
Macintosh®: Press “+Enter.
iPad®: Hold enter, and select .

' (prime) º key

variable '
variable ' '
Enters a prime symbol in a differential
equation. A single prime symbol denotes
a 1st-order differential equation, two
prime symbols denote a 2nd-order, and
so on.

See “Empty (Void)

_ (underscore as an empty element) Elements,” page 255.

_ (underscore as unit designator) /_ keys

Expr_Unit

Symbols 233
 _ (underscore as unit designator) /_ keys
Designates the units for an Expr. All unit Note: You can find the conversion symbol, ►,
names must begin with an underscore.
in the Catalogue. Click , and then click
You can use pre-defined units or create Maths Operators.
your own units. For a list of pre-defined
units, open the Catalogue and display
the Unit Conversions tab. You can select
unit names from the Catalogue or type
the unit names directly.
Variable_ Assuming z is undefined:

When Variable has no value, it is

treated as though it represents a
complex number. By default, without the
_ , the variable is treated as real.
If Variable has a value, the _ is ignored
and Variable retains its original data
type.
Note: You can store a complex number
to a variable without
using _ . However, for best results in
calculations such as cSolve() and cZeros(),
the _ is recommended.

► (convert) /k keys
Expr_Unit1►_Unit2 ⇒ Expr_Unit2
Converts an expression from one unit to
another.
The _ underscore character designates
the units. The units must be in the same
category, such as Length or Area.
For a list of pre-defined units, open the
Catalogue and display the Unit
Conversions tab:
• You can select a unit name from the
list.
• You can select the conversion
operator, ►, from the top of the list.
You can also type unit names manually.
To type “_” when typing unit names on
the handheld, press /_.

234 Symbols
► (convert) /k keys
Note: To convert temperature units, use
tmpCnv() and ΔtmpCnv(). The ►
conversion operator does not handle
temperature units.

10^() Catalogue >

10^ (Expr1) ⇒ expression
10^ (List1) ⇒ list
Returns 10 raised to the power of the
argument.
For a list, returns 10 raised to the power
of the elements in List1.
10^(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix
Returns 10 raised to the power of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating 10 raised to the power of
each element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos().
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
The result always contains floating-point
numbers.

^-1 (reciprocal) Catalogue >

Expr1 ^-1 ⇒ expression
List1 ^-1 ⇒ list
Returns the reciprocal of the argument.
For a list, returns the reciprocals of the
elements in List1.
squareMatrix1 ^-1 ⇒ squareMatrix
Returns the inverse of squareMatrix1.
squareMatrix1 must be a non-singular
square matrix.

Symbols 235
 | (constraint operator) /k keys
Expr | BooleanExpr1[and
BooleanExpr2]...
Expr | BooleanExpr1[
orBooleanExpr2]...
The constraint (“|”) symbol serves as a
binary operator. The operand to the left
of | is an expression. The operand to the
right of | specifies one or more relations
that are intended to affect the
simplification of the expression. Multiple
relations after | must be joined by logical
“and” or “or” operators.
The constraint operator provides three
basic types of functionality:
• Substitutions
• Interval constraints
• Exclusions
Substitutions are in the form of an
equality, such as x=3 or y=sin(x). To be
most effective, the left side should be a
simple variable. Expr | Variable = value
will substitute value for every
occurrence of Variable in Expr.
Interval constraints take the form of one
or more inequalities joined by logical
“and” or “or” operators. Interval
constraints also permit simplification
that otherwise might be invalid or not
computable.

236 Symbols
| (constraint operator) /k keys
Exclusions use the “not equals” (/= or ≠)
relational operator to exclude a specific
value from consideration. They are used
primarily to exclude an exact solution
when using cSolve(), cZeros(), fMax(),
fMin(), solve(), zeros(), and so on.

→ (store) /h key
Expr → Var
List → Var
Matrix → Var
Expr → Function(Param1,...)
List → Function(Param1,...)
Matrix → Function(Param1,...)
If the variable Var does not exist, creates
it and initializes it to Expr, List, or
Matrix.
If the variable Var already exists and is
not locked or protected, replaces its
contents with Expr, List, or Matrix.
Hint: If you plan to do symbolic
computations using undefined variables,
avoid storing anything into commonly
used, one-letter variables such as a, b, c,
x, y, z, and so on.
Note: You can insert this operator from
the keyboard by typing =: as a shortcut.
For example, type pi/4 =: myvar.

Symbols 237
 := (assign) /t keys
Var := Expr
Var := List
Var := Matrix
Function(Param1,...) := Expr
Function(Param1,...) := List
Function(Param1,...) := Matrix
If variable Var does not exist, creates
Var and initializes it to Expr, List, or
Matrix.
If Var already exists and is not locked or
protected, replaces its contents with
Expr, List, or Matrix.
Hint: If you plan to do symbolic
computations using undefined variables,
avoid storing anything into commonly
used, one-letter variables such as a, b, c,
x, y, z, and so on.

© (comment) /k keys
© [text]
© processes text as a comment line,
allowing you to annotate functions and
programs that you create.
© can be at the beginning or anywhere
in the line. Everything to the right of ©,
to the end of the line, is the comment.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line
programme and function definitions,
refer to the Calculator section of your
product guidebook.

0b, 0h 0B keys, 0H keys

0b binaryNumber In Dec base mode:
0h hexadecimalNumber

238 Symbols
0b, 0h 0B keys, 0H keys
Denotes a binary or hexadecimal
number, respectively. To enter a binary In Bin base mode:
or hex number, you must enter the 0b or
0h prefix regardless of the Base mode.
Without a prefix, a number is treated as
decimal (base 10).
In Hex base mode:
Results are displayed according to the
Base mode.

Symbols 239
TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands
This is a supplemental document for the TI-Nspire™ Reference Guide and the TI-
Nspire™ CAS Reference Guide. All TI-Nspire™ CX II commands will be incorporated and
published in version 5.1 of the TI-Nspire™ Reference Guide and the TI-Nspire™ CAS
Reference Guide.

Graphics Programming
New commands have been added on TI-Nspire™ CX II Handhelds and TI-Nspire™
desktop applications for graphics programming.
The TI-Nspire™ CX II Handhelds will switch into this graphics mode while executing
graphics commands and switch back to the context in which the program was executed
after completion of the program.
The screen will display “Running…” in the top bar while the program is being executed.
It will show “Finished” when the program completes. Any key-press will transition the
system out of the graphics mode.
• The transition to graphics mode is triggered automatically when one of the Draw
(graphics) commands is encountered during execution of the TI-Basic program.
• This transition will only happen when executing a program from calculator; in a
document or calculator in scratchpad.
• The transition out of graphics mode happens upon termination of the program.
• The graphics mode is only available on the TI-Nspire™ CX II Handhelds and the
desktop TI-Nspire™ CX II Handhelds view. This means it is not available in the
computer document view on the desktop nor on iOS.
- If a graphics command is encountered while executing a TI-Basic program from
the incorrect context, an error message is displayed and the TI-Basic program is
terminated.
Graphics Screen
The graphics screen will contain a header at the top of the screen that cannot be
written to by graphics commands.
The graphics screen drawing area will be cleared (colour = 255,255,255) when the
graphics screen is initialized.

Graphics Default
Screen
Height 212
Width 318
Colour white: 255,255,255

240 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

Default View and Settings
• The status icons in the top bar (battery status, press-to-test status, network
indicator etc.) will not be visible while a graphics program is running.
• Default drawing colour: Black (0,0,0)
• Default pen style - normal, smooth
- Thickness: 1 (thin), 2 (normal), 3 (thickest)
- Style: 1 (smooth), 2 (dotted), 3 (dashed)
• All drawing commands will use the current colour and pen settings; either default
values or those which were set via TI-Basic commands.
• Text font is fixed and cannot be changed.
• Any output to the graphics screen will be drawn within a clipping window which is
the size of the graphics screen drawing area. Any drawn output that extends
outside of this clipped graphics screen drawing area will not be drawn. No error
message will be displayed.
• All x,y coordinates specified for drawing commands are defined such that 0,0 is at
the top left corner of the graphics screen drawing area.
- Exceptions:
- DrawText uses the coordinates as the bottom left corner of the bounding
box for the text.
- SetWindow uses the bottom left corner of the screen
• All parameters for the commands can be provided as expressions that evaluate to a
number which is then rounded to the nearest integer.

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 241

Graphics Screen Errors Messages
If the validation fails, an error message will display.

Error Message Description View

Error If the syntax checker finds any
Syntax syntax errors, it displays an error
message and tries to position the
cursor near the first error so you
can correct it.
Error The function or command is missing
Too few one or more arguments
arguments

Error The function or command contains

Too many and excessive number of arguments
arguments and cannot be evaluated.

Error An argument is of the wrong data

Invalid data type type.

Invalid Commands While in Graphics Mode

Some commands are not allowed once the program switches to graphics mode. If these
commands are encountered while in graphics mode an error will be displayed and the
program will be terminated.

Disallowed Error Message

Command
Request Request cannot be executed in graphics mode
RequestStr RequestStr cannot be executed in graphics mode
Text Text cannot be executed in graphics mode

The commands that print text to the calculator - disp and dispAt - will be supported
commands in the graphics context. The text from these commands will be sent to the
Calculator screen (not on Graphics) and will be visible after the program exits and the
system switches back to the Calculator app

242 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

C

Clear Catalogue >

CXII
Clear x, y, width, height Clear
Clears entire screen
Clears entire screen if no parameters are specified.
If x, y, width and height are specified, the rectangle Clear 10,10,100,50
defined by the parameters will be cleared.
Clears a rectangle area
with top left corner on
(10, 10) and with width
100, height 50

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 243

D

DrawArc Catalogue >

CXII
DrawArc x, y, width, height, startAngle, arcAngle DrawArc 20,20,100,100,0,90

Draw an arc within the defined bounding rectangle

with the provided start and arc angles.
x, y: upper left coordinate of bounding rectangle
width, height: dimensions of bounding rectangle
The "arc angle" defines the sweep of the arc.
These parameters can be provided as expressions
DrawArc 50,50,100,100,0,180
that evaluate to a number which is then rounded to
the nearest integer.

See Also: FillArc

DrawCircle Catalogue >

CXII
DrawCircle x, y, radius DrawCircle 150,150,40

x, y: coordinate of centre
radius: radius of the circle

See Also: FillCircle

244 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

DrawLine Catalogue >
CXII
DrawLine x1, y1, x2, y2 DrawLine 10,10,150,200

Draw a line from x1, y1, x2, y2.

Expressions that evaluate to a number which is then
rounded to the nearest integer.
Screen bounds: If the specified coordinates causes
any part of the line to be drawn outside of the
graphics screen, that part of the line will be clipped
and no error message will be displayed.

DrawPoly Catalogue >

CXII
The commands have two variants: xlist:={0,200,150,0}
ylist:={10,20,150,10}
DrawPoly xlist, ylist
DrawPoly xlist,ylist
or
DrawPoly x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3...xn, yn
Note: DrawPoly xlist, ylist
Shape will connect x1, y1 to x2, y2, x2, y2 to x3, y3
and so on.
Note: DrawPoly x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3...xn, yn
xn, yn will NOT be automatically connected to x1, y1.
DrawPoly
Expressions that evaluate to a list of real floats 0,10,200,20,150,150,0,10
xlist, ylist
Expressions that evaluate to a single real float
x1, y1...xn, yn = coordinates for vertices of polygon
Note: DrawPoly: Input size dimensions (width/height)
relative to drawn lines.
The lines are drawn in a bounding box around the
specified coordinate and dimensions such that the
actual size of the drawn polygon will be larger than
the width and height.
See Also: FillPoly

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 245

 DrawRect Catalogue >
CXII
DrawRect x, y, width, height DrawRect 25,25,100,50

x, y: upper left coordinate of rectangle

width, height: width and height of rectangle
(rectangle drawn down and right from starting
coordinate).
Note: The lines are drawn in a bounding box around
the specified coordinate and dimensions such that
the actual size of the drawn rectangle will be larger
than the width and height indicated.
See Also: FillRect

DrawText Catalogue >

CXII
DrawText x, y, exprOrString1 [,exprOrString2]... DrawText 50,50,"Hello
World"
x, y: coordinate of text output
Draws the text in exprOrString at the specified x, y
coordinate location.
The rules for exprOrString are the same as for Disp –
DrawText can take multiple arguments.

246 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

F

FillArc Catalogue >

CXII
FillArc x, y, width, height startAngle, arcAngle FillArc 50,50,100,100,0,180

x, y: upper left coordinate of bounding rectangle

Draw and fill an arc within the defined bounding
rectangle with the provided start and arc angles.
Default fill colour is black. The fill colour can be set by
the SetColor command
The "arc angle" defines the sweep of the arc

FillCircle Catalogue >

CXII
FillCircle x, y, radius FillCircle 150,150,40

x, y: coordinate of centre
Draw and fill a circle at the specified centre with the
specified radius.
Default fill colour is black. The fill colour can be set by
the SetColor command.
Here!

FillPoly Catalogue >

CXII
FillPoly xlist, ylist xlist:={0,200,150,0}

or ylist:={10,20,150,10}
FillPoly xlist,ylist
FillPoly x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3...xn, yn
Note: The line and colour are specified by SetColor
and SetPen

FillPoly
0,10,200,20,150,150,0,10

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 247

 FillPoly Catalogue >
CXII

FillRect Catalogue >

CXII
FillRect x, y, width, height FillRect 25,25,100,50

x, y: upper left coordinate of rectangle

width, height: width and height of rectangle
Draw and fill a rectangle with the top left corner at
the coordinate specified by (x,y)
Default fill colour is black. The fill colour can be set by
the SetColor command
Note: The line and colour are specified by SetColor
and SetPen

248 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

G

getPlatform() Catalogue >

CXII
getPlatform()
Returns:
“dt” on desktop software applications
“hh” on TI-Nspire™ CX handhelds
“ios” on TI-Nspire™ CX iPad® app

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 249

P

PaintBuffer Catalogue >

CXII
PaintBuffer UseBuffer
For n,1,10
Paint graphics buffer to screen
x:=randInt(0,300)
This command is used in conjunction with UseBuffer y:=randInt(0,200)
to increase the speed of display on the screen when
the program generates multiple graphical objects. radius:=randInt(10,50)
Wait 0.5
DrawCircle x,y,radius
EndFor
PaintBuffer
This program will display
all the 10 circles at once.
If the “UseBuffer” command
is removed, each circle
will be displayed as it is
drawn.

See Also: UseBuffer

250 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

PlotXY Catalogue >
CXII
PlotXY x, y, shape PlotXY 100,100,1

x, y: coordinate to plot shape

shape : a number between 1 and 13 specifying the
shape
1 - Filled circle
2 - Empty circle
3 - Filled square
For n,1,13
4 - Empty square DrawText 1+22*n,40,n

5 - Cross PlotXY 5+22*n,50,n

EndFor
6 - Plus
7 - Thin
8 - medium point, solid
9 - medium point, empty
10 - larger point, solid
11 - larger point, empty
12 - largest point, solid
13 - largest point, empty

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 251

S

SetColor Catalogue >

CXII
SetColor SetColor 255,0,0
DrawCircle 150,150,100
Red-value, Green-value, Blue-value
Valid values for red, green and blue are between 0
and 255
Sets the colour for subsequent Draw commands

SetPen Catalogue >

CXII
SetPen SetPen 3,3
DrawCircle 150,150,50
thickness, style
thickness: 1 <= thickness <= 3|1 is thinnest, 3 is
thickest
style: 1 = Smooth, 2 = Dotted, 3 = Dashed
Sets the pen style for subsequent Draw commands

SetWindow Catalogue >

CXII
SetWindow SetWindow 0,160,0,120
will set the output window
xMin, xMax, yMin, yMax to have 0,0 in the bottom
left corner with a width of
Establishes a logical window that maps to the 160 and a height of 120
graphics drawing area. All parameters are required. DrawLine 0,0,100,100
If the part of drawn object is outside the window, the SetWindow 0,160,0,120
output will be clipped (not shown) and no error SetPen 3,3
message is displayed.
DrawLine 0,0,100,100

252 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

SetWindow Catalogue >
CXII
If xmin is greater than or equal to xmax or ymin is
greater than or equal to ymax, an error message is
shown.
Any objects drawn before a SetWindow command
will not be re-drawn in the new configuration.
To reset the window parameters to the default, use:
SetWindow 0,0,0,0

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 253

U

UseBuffer Catalogue >

CXII
UseBuffer UseBuffer
For n,1,10
Draw to an off screen graphics buffer instead of
screen (to increase performance) x:=randInt(0,300)
y:=randInt(0,200)
This command is used in conjunction with PaintBuffer
to increase the speed of display on the screen when radius:=randInt(10,50)
the program generates multiple graphical objects. Wait 0.5
DrawCircle x,y,radius
With UseBuffer, all the graphics are displayed only
after the next PaintBuffer command is executed. EndFor
PaintBuffer
UseBuffer only needs to be called once in the
program i.e. every use of PaintBuffer does not need a This program will display all the
corresponding UseBuffer 10 circles at once.

If the “UseBuffer” command is

removed, each circle will be
displayed as it is drawn.
See Also: PaintBuffer

254 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

Empty (Void) Elements
When analyzing real-world data, you might not always have a complete data set.
TI-Nspire™ CAS Software allows empty, or void, data elements so you can proceed with
the nearly complete data rather than having to start over or discard the incomplete
cases.
You can find an example of data involving empty elements in the Lists & Spreadsheet
chapter, under “Graphing spreadsheet data.”
The delVoid() function lets you remove empty elements from a list. The isVoid()
function lets you test for an empty element. For details, see delVoid(), page 49, and
isVoid(), page 95.
Note: To enter an empty element manually in a maths expression, type “_” or the
keyword void. The keyword void is automatically converted to a “_” symbol when
the expression is evaluated. To type “_” on the handheld, press / _.

Calculations involving void elements

The majority of calculations involving a
void input will produce a void result. See
special cases below.

List arguments containing void elements

The following functions and commands
ignore (skip) void elements found in list
arguments.
count, countIf, cumulativeSum,
freqTable4list, frequency, max, mean,
median, product, stDevPop, stDevSamp,
sum, sumIf, varPop and varSamp, as well
as regression calculations, OneVar,
TwoVar and FiveNumSummary statistics,
confidence intervals and stat tests

SortA and SortD move all void elements

within the first argument to the bottom.

Empty (Void) Elements 255

 List arguments containing void elements

In regressions, a void in an X or Y list

introduces a void for the corresponding
element of the residual.

An omitted category in regressions

introduces a void for the corresponding
element of the residual.

A frequency of 0 in regressions
introduces a void for the corresponding
element of the residual.

256 Empty (Void) Elements

Shortcuts for Entering Maths Expressions
Shortcuts let you enter elements of maths expressions by typing instead of using the
Catalogue or Symbol Palette. For example, to enter the expression ‡6, you can type
sqrt(6) on the entry line. When you press ·, the expression sqrt(6) is changed
to ‡6. Some shortrcuts are useful from both the handheld and the computer keyboard.
Others are useful primarily from the computer keyboard.
From the Handheld or Computer Keyboard
To enter this: Type this shortcut:
p pi
q theta
ˆ infinity
{ <=
| >=
ƒ /=
⇒ (logical implication) =>
dd⇔ (logical double <=>
implication, XNOR)
& (store operator) =:
| | (absolute value) abs(...)
‡() sqrt(...)
d() derivative(...)
‰() integral(...)
G() (Sum template) sumSeq(...)
Π() (Product template) prodSeq(...)
sin/(), cos/(), ... arcsin(...), arccos(...), ...
@List() deltaList(...)
@tmpCnv() deltaTmpCnv(...)

From the Computer Keyboard

To enter this: Type this shortcut:
c1, c2, ... (constants) @c1, @c2, ...
n1, n2, ... (integer @n1, @n2, ...
constants)
i (imaginary constant) @i

Shortcuts for Entering Maths Expressions 257

 To enter this: Type this shortcut:
e (natural log base e) @e
E (scientific notation) @E
T (transpose) @t

R (radians) @r
¡ (degrees) @d
g (gradians) @g
± (angle) @<
4 (conversion) @>
4Decimal, 4approxFraction() @>Decimal, @>approxFraction() and so on.
and so on.

258 Shortcuts for Entering Maths Expressions

EOS™ (Equation Operating System) Hierarchy
This section describes the Equation Operating System (EOS™) that is used by the
TI-Nspire™ CAS maths and science learning technology. Numbers, variables and
functions are entered in a simple, straightforward sequence. EOS™ software evaluates
expressions and equations using parenthetical grouping and according to the priorities
described below.
Order of Evaluation
Level Operator
1 Parentheses ( ), brackets [ ], braces { }
2 Indirection (#)
3 Function calls
4 Post operators: degrees-minutes-seconds (¡,',"), factorial (!), percentage
(%), radian (QRS), subscript ([ ]), transpose (T)
5 Exponentiation, power operator (^)
6 Negation (L)
7 String concatenation (&)
8 Multiplication (†), division (/)
9 Addition (+), subtraction (-)
10 Equality relations: equal (=), not equal (ƒ or /=), less than (<), less than or
equal ({ or <=), greater than (>), greater than or equal (| or >=)
11 Logical not
12 Logical and
13 Logical or
14 xor, nor, nand
15 Logical implication (⇒)
16 Logical double implication, XNOR (⇔)
17 Constraint operator (“|”)
18 Store (&)

Parentheses, Brackets and Braces

All calculations inside a pair of parentheses, brackets, or braces are evaluated first. For
example, in the expression 4(1+2), EOS™ software first evaluates the portion of the
expression inside the parentheses, 1+2, and then multiplies the result, 3, by 4.
The number of opening and closing parentheses, brackets and braces must be the same
within an expression or equation. If not, an error message is displayed that indicates

EOS™ (Equation Operating System) Hierarchy 259

the missing element. For example, (1+2)/(3+4 will display the error message “Missing
).”
Note: Because the TI-Nspire™ CAS software allows you to define your own functions, a
variable name followed by an expression in parentheses is considered a “function call”
instead of implied multiplication. For example a(b+c) is the function a evaluated by b+c.
To multiply the expression b+c by the variable a, use explicit multiplication: a∗(b+c).
Indirection
The indirection operator (#) converts a string to a variable or function name. For
example, #(“x”&”y”&”z”) creates the variable name xyz. Indirection also allows the
creation and modification of variables from inside a programme. For example, if 10&r
and “r”&s1, then #s1=10.
Post Operators
Post operators are operators that come directly after an argument, such as 5!, 25%, or
60¡15' 45". Arguments followed by a post operator are evaluated at the fourth priority
level. For example, in the expression 4^3!, 3! is evaluated first. The result, 6, then
becomes the exponent of 4 to yield 4096.
Exponentiation
Exponentiation (^) and element-by-element exponentiation (.^) are evaluated from
right to left. For example, the expression 2^3^2 is evaluated the same as 2^(3^2) to
produce 512. This is different from (2^3)^2, which is 64.
Negation

To enter a negative number, press v followed by the number. Post operations and
exponentiation are performed before negation. For example, the result of Lx2 is a
negative number, and L92 = L81. Use parentheses to square a negative number such as
(L9)2 to produce 81.
Constraint (“|”)
The argument following the constraint (“|”) operator provides a set of constraints that
affect the evaluation of the argument preceding the operator.

260 EOS™ (Equation Operating System) Hierarchy

TI-Nspire CX II - TI-Basic Programming Features
Auto-indentation in Programming Editor
The TI-Nspire™ program editor now auto-indents statements inside a block command.
Block commands are If/EndIf, For/EndFor, While/EndWhile, Loop/EndLoop, Try/EndTry
The editor will automatically prepend spaces to program commands inside a block
command. The closing command of the block will be aligned with the opening
command.
The example below shows auto-indentation in nested block commands.

Code fragments that are copied and pasted will retain the original indentation.
Opening a program created in an earlier version of the software will retain the original
indentation.

Improved Error Messages for TI-Basic

Errors

Error Condition New message

Error in condition statement (If/While) A conditional statement did not resolve to

TRUE or FALSE
NOTE: With the change to place the cursor on
the line with the error, we no longer need to
specify if the error is in an "If" statement or a
"While" statement.

Missing EndIf Expected EndIf but found a different end

statement

Missing EndFor Expected EndFor but found a different end

statement

Missing EndWhile Expected EndWhile but found a different end

statement

Missing EndLoop Expected EndLoop but found a different end

statement

TI-Nspire CX II - TI-Basic Programming Features 261

 Error Condition New message

Missing EndTry Expected EndTry but found a different end

statement

“Then” omitted after If <condition> Missing If..Then

“Then” omitted after ElseIf <condition> Then missing in block: ElseIf.

When “Then”, “Else” and “ElseIf” were Else invalid outside of blocks: If..Then..EndIf or
encountered outside of control blocks Try..EndTry

“ElseIf” appears outside of “If..Then..EndIf” ElseIf invalid outside of block: If..Then..EndIf

block

"Then” appears outside of “If....EndIf” block Then invalid outside of block: If..EndIf

Syntax Errors
In case commands that expect one or more arguments are called with an incomplete
list of arguments, a “Too few argument error” will be issued instead of “syntax” error

Current behaviour New CX II behaviour

262 TI-Nspire CX II - TI-Basic Programming Features

 Current behaviour New CX II behaviour

Note: When an incomplete list of arguments is not followed by a comma, the error
message is: “too few arguments”. This is the same as previous releases.

TI-Nspire CX II - TI-Basic Programming Features 263

Constants and Values
The following table lists the constants and their values that are available when
performing unit conversions. They can be typed in manually or selected from the
Constants list in Utilities > Unit Conversions (Handheld: Press k 3).

Constant Name Value

_c Speed of light 299792458 _m/_s
_Cc Coulomb constant 8987551787.3682 _m/_F
_Fc Faraday constant 96485.33289 _coul/_mol
_g Acceleration of gravity 9.80665 _m/_s2

_Gc Gravitational constant 6.67408E-11 _m3/_kg/_s2

_h Planck's constant 6.626070040E-34 _J _s

_k Boltzmann's constant 1.38064852E-23 _J/_¡K
_m0 Permeability of a vacuum 1.2566370614359E-6 _N/_A2

_mb Bohr magneton 9.274009994E-24 _J _m2/_Wb

_Me Electron rest mass 9.10938356E-31 _kg

_Mm Muon mass 1.883531594E-28 _kg
_Mn Neutron rest mass 1.674927471E-27 _kg
_Mp Proton rest mass 1.672621898E-27 _kg
_Na Avogadro's number 6.022140857E23 /_mol
_q Electron charge 1.6021766208E-19 _coul
_Rb Bohr radius 5.2917721067E-11 _m
_Rc Molar gas constant 8.3144598 _J/_mol/_¡K
_Rdb Rydberg constant 10973731.568508/_m
_Re Electron radius 2.8179403227E-15 _m
_u Atomic mass 1.660539040E-27 _kg
_Vm Molar volume 2.2413962E-2 _m3/_mol

_H0 Permittivity of a vacuum 8.8541878176204E-12 _F/_m

_s Stefan-Boltzmann constant 5.670367E-8 _W/_m2/_¡K4

_f0 Magnetic flux quantum 2.067833831E-15 _Wb

264 Constants and Values

Error Codes and Messages
When an error occurs, its code is assigned to variable errCode. User-defined programs
and functions can examine errCode to determine the cause of an error. For an example
of using errCode, See Example 2 under the Try command, page 193.
Note: Some error conditions apply only to TI-Nspire™ CAS products, and some apply
only to TI-Nspire™ products.

Error code Description

10 A function did not return a value

20 A test did not resolve to TRUE or FALSE.

Generally, undefined variables cannot be compared. For example, the test If a<b
will cause this error if either a or b is undefined when the If statement is
executed.

30 Argument cannot be a folder name.

40 Argument error

50 Argument mismatch

Two or more arguments must be of the same type.

60 Argument must be a Boolean expression or integer

70 Argument must be a decimal number

90 Argument must be a list

100 Argument must be a matrix

130 Argument must be a string

140 Argument must be a variable name.

Make sure that the name:

• does not begin with a digit
• does not contain spaces or special characters
• does not use underscore or period in invalid manner
• does not exceed the length limitations
See the Calculator section in the documentation for more details.

160 Argument must be an expression

165 Batteries too low for sending or receiving

Install new batteries before sending or receiving.

170 Bound

Error Codes and Messages 265

Error code Description
The lower bound must be less than the upper bound to define the search
interval.

180 Break

The d or c key was pressed during a long calculation or during

programme execution.

190 Circular definition

This message is displayed to avoid running out of memory during infinite

replacement of variable values during simplification. For example, a+1->a, where
a is an undefined variable, will cause this error.

200 Constraint expression invalid

For example, solve(3x^2-4=0,x) | x<0 or x>5 would produce this error message
because the constraint is separated by “or” instead of “and.”

210 Invalid Data type

An argument is of the wrong data type.

220 Dependent limit

230 Dimension

A list or matrix index is not valid. For example, if the list {1,2,3,4} is stored in L1,
then L1[5] is a dimension error because L1 only contains four elements.

235 Dimension Error. Not enough elements in the lists.

240 Dimension mismatch

Two or more arguments must be of the same dimension. For example, [1,2]+
[1,2,3] is a dimension mismatch because the matrices contain a different
number of elements.

250 Divide by zero

260 Domain error

An argument must be in a specified domain. For example, rand(0) is not valid.

270 Duplicate variable name

280 Else and ElseIf invalid outside of If...EndIf block

290 EndTry is missing the matching Else statement

295 Excessive iteration

300 Expected 2 or 3-element list or matrix

266 Error Codes and Messages

Error code Description
310 The first argument of nSolve must be an equation in a single variable. It cannot
contain a non-valued variable other than the variable of interest.

320 First argument of solve or cSolve must be an equation or inequality

For example, solve(3x^2-4,x) is invalid because the first argument is not an

equation.

345 Inconsistent units

350 Index out of range

360 Indirection string is not a valid variable name

380 Undefined Ans

Either the previous calculation did not create Ans, or no previous calculation was
entered.

390 Invalid assignment

400 Invalid assignment value

410 Invalid command

430 Invalid for the current mode settings

435 Invalid guess

440 Invalid implied multiply

For example, x(x+1) is invalid; whereas, x*(x+1) is the correct syntax. This is to
avoid confusion between implied multiplication and function calls.

450 Invalid in a function or current expression

Only certain commands are valid in a user-defined function.

490 Invalid in Try..EndTry block

510 Invalid list or matrix

550 Invalid outside function or programme

A number of commands are not valid outside a function or programme. For

example, Local cannot be used unless it is in a function or programme.

560 Invalid outside Loop..EndLoop, For..EndFor, or While..EndWhile blocks

For example, the Exit command is valid only inside these loop blocks.

565 Invalid outside programme

570 Invalid pathname

For example, \var is invalid.

Error Codes and Messages 267

Error code Description
575 Invalid polar complex

580 Invalid programme reference

Programs cannot be referenced within functions or expressions such as 1+p(x)

where p is a programme.

600 Invalid table

605 Invalid use of units

610 Invalid variable name in a Local statement

620 Invalid variable or function name

630 Invalid variable reference

640 Invalid vector syntax

650 Link transmission

A transmission between two units was not completed. Verify that the connecting
cable is connected firmly to both ends.

665 Matrix not diagonalisable

670 Low Memory

1. Delete some data in this document

2. Save and close this document

If 1 and 2 fail, pull out and re-insert batteries

672 Resource exhaustion

673 Resource exhaustion

680 Missing (

690 Missing )

700 Missing “

710 Missing ]

720 Missing }

730 Missing start or end of block syntax

740 Missing Then in the If..EndIf block

750 Name is not a function or programme

765 No functions selected

268 Error Codes and Messages

Error code Description
780 No solution found

800 Non-real result

For example, if the software is in the Real setting, ‡(-1) is invalid.

To allow complex results, change the “Real or Complex” Mode Setting to

RECTANGULAR or POLAR.

830 Overflow

850 programme not found

A programme reference inside another programme could not be found in the

provided path during execution.

855 Rand type functions not allowed in graphing

860 Recursion too deep

870 Reserved name or system variable

900 Argument error

Median-median model could not be applied to data set.

910 Syntax error

920 Text not found

930 Too few arguments

The function or command is missing one or more arguments.

940 Too many arguments

The expression or equation contains an excessive number of arguments and

cannot be evaluated.

950 Too many subscripts

955 Too many undefined variables

960 Variable is not defined

No value is assigned to variable. Use one of the following commands:

• sto &
• :=
• Define
to assign values to variables.

965 Unlicensed OS

970 Variable in use so references or changes are not allowed

Error Codes and Messages 269

Error code Description
980 Variable is protected

990 Invalid variable name

Make sure that the name does not exceed the length limitations

1000 Window variables domain

1010 Zoom

1020 Internal error

1030 Protected memory violation

1040 Unsupported function. This function requires Computer Algebra System. Try
TI-Nspire™ CAS.

1045 Unsupported operator. This operator requires Computer Algebra System. Try
TI-Nspire™ CAS.

1050 Unsupported feature. This operator requires Computer Algebra System. Try
TI-Nspire™ CAS.

1060 Input argument must be numeric. Only inputs containing numeric values are
allowed.

1070 Trig function argument too big for accurate reduction

1080 Unsupported use of Ans.This application does not support Ans.

1090 Function is not defined. Use one of the following commands:

• Define
• :=
• sto &
to define a function.

1100 Non-real calculation

For example, if the software is in the Real setting, ‡(-1) is invalid.

To allow complex results, change the “Real or Complex” Mode Setting to

RECTANGULAR or POLAR.

1110 Invalid bounds

1120 No sign change

1130 Argument cannot be a list or matrix

1140 Argument error

The first argument must be a polynomial expression in the second argument. If

the second argument is omitted, the software attempts to select a default.

270 Error Codes and Messages

Error code Description
1150 Argument error

The first two arguments must be polynomial expressions in the third argument.
If the third argument is omitted, the software attempts to select a default.

1160 Invalid library pathname

A pathname must be in the form xxx\yyy, where:

• The xxx part can have 1 to 16 characters.
• The yyy part can have 1 to 15 characters.
See the Library section in the documentation for more details.

1170 Invalid use of library pathname

• A value cannot be assigned to a pathname using Define, :=, or sto &.
• A pathname cannot be declared as a Local variable or be used as a
parameter in a function or programme definition.
1180 Invalid library variable name.

Make sure that the name:

• Does not contain a period
• Does not begin with an underscore
• Does not exceed 15 characters
See the Library section in the documentation for more details.

1190 Library document not found:

• Verify library is in the MyLib folder.
• Refresh Libraries.
See the Library section in the documentation for more details.

1200 Library variable not found:

• Verify library variable exists in the first problem in the library.
• Make sure library variable has been defined as LibPub or LibPriv.
• Refresh Libraries.
See the Library section in the documentation for more details.

1210 Invalid library shortcut name.

Make sure that the name:

• Does not contain a period
• Does not begin with an underscore
• Does not exceed 16 characters
• Is not a reserved name
See the Library section in the documentation for more details.

Error Codes and Messages 271

Error code Description
1220 Domain error:

The tangentLine and normalLine functions support real-valued functions only.

1230 Domain error.

Trigonometric conversion operators are not supported in Degree or Gradian

angle modes.

1250 Argument Error

Use a system of linear equations.

Example of a system of two linear equations with variables x and y:

3x+7y=5

2y-5x=-1

1260 Argument Error:

The first argument of nfMin or nfMax must be an expression in a single variable.

It cannot contain a non-valued variable other than the variable of interest.

1270 Argument Error

Order of the derivative must be equal to 1 or 2.

1280 Argument Error

Use a polynomial in expanded form in one variable.

1290 Argument Error

Use a polynomial in one variable.

1300 Argument Error

The coefficients of the polynomial must evaluate to numeric values.

1310 Argument error:

A function could not be evaluated for one or more of its arguments.

1380 Argument error:

Nested calls to domain() function are not allowed.

272 Error Codes and Messages

Warning Codes and Messages
You can use the warnCodes() function to store the codes of warnings generated by
evaluating an expression. This table lists each numeric warning code and its associated
message. For an example of storing warning codes, see warnCodes(), page 202.

Warning
code Message
10000 Operation might introduce false solutions.

When applicable, try using graphical methods to verify the results.

10001 Differentiating an equation may produce a false equation.

10002 Questionable solution

When applicable, try using graphical methods to verify the results.

10003 Questionable accuracy

When applicable, try using graphical methods to verify the results.

10004 Operation might lose solutions.

When applicable, try using graphical methods to verify the results.

10005 cSolve might specify more zeroes.

10006 Solve may specify more zeroes.

When applicable, try using graphical methods to verify the results.

10007 More solutions may exist. Try specifying appropriate lower and upper bounds
and/or a guess.

Examples using solve():

• solve(Equation, Var=Guess)|lowBound<Var<upBound
• solve(Equation, Var)|lowBound<Var<upBound
• solve(Equation, Var=Guess)
When applicable, try using graphical methods to verify the results.

10008 Domain of the result might be smaller than the domain of the input.

10009 Domain of the result might be larger than the domain of the input.

10012 Non-real calculation

10013 ∞^0 or undef^0 replaced by 1

10014 undef^0 replaced by 1

10015 1^∞ or 1^undef replaced by 1

10016 1^undef replaced by 1

Warning Codes and Messages 273

Warning
code Message
10017 Overflow replaced by ∞ or −∞

10018 Operation requires and returns 64 bit value.

10019 Resource exhaustion, simplification might be incomplete.

10020 Trig function argument too big for accurate reduction.

10021 Input contains an undefined parameter.

Result might not be valid for all possible parameter values.

10022 Specifying appropriate lower and upper bounds might produce a solution.

10023 Scalar has been multiplied by the identity matrix.

10024 Result obtained using approximate arithmetic.

10025 Equivalence cannot be verified in EXACT mode.

10026 Constraint might be ignored. Specify constraint in the form "\" 'Variable
MathTestSymbol Constant' or a conjunct of these forms, for example 'x<3 and x>-
12'

274 Warning Codes and Messages

General Information
Online Help
education.ti.com/eguide
Select your country for more product information.

Contact TI Support
education.ti.com/ti-cares
Select your country for technical and other support resources.

Service and Warranty Information

education.ti.com/warranty
Select your country for information about the length and terms of the warranty or
about product service.
Limited Warranty. This warranty does not affect your statutory rights.
Texas Instruments Incorporated
12500 TI Blvd.
Dallas, TX 75243

General Information 275

Index _
_, unit designation 233
-
|
-, subtract 213
|, constraint operator 236
!
′
!, factorial 224
′ minute notation 232
" ′, prime 233

", second notation 232 +

# +, add 213

#, indirection 230 =
#, indirection operator 260
=, equal 219
% ≠, not equal 220

%, percent 219 >

& >, greater than 222

&, append 224 ∏

* ∏, product 227

*, multiply 214 ∑

. ∑( ), sum 228
∑Int( ) 228
.-, dot subtraction 217 ∑Prn( ) 229
.*, dot multiplication 218
./, dot division 218 √
.^, dot power 218
.+, dot addition 217 √, square root 226

/ ∠

/, divide 215 ∠ (angle) 232

: ∫

:=, assign 238 ∫, integral 225

^ ≤

^⁻¹, reciprocal 235 ≤, less than or equal 221

^, power 216

276 Index
 ≥ 1
≥, greater than or equal 222 10^( ), power of ten 235

► 2
►, convert units 234 2-sample F Test 76
►approxFraction( ) 14
►Base10, display as decimal integer 19 A
►Base16, display as hexadecimal 19
►Base2, display as binary 17 abs( ), absolute value 8
►cos, display in terms of cosine 30 absolute value
►Cylind, display as cylindrical vector 43 template for 3-4
►DD, display as decimal angle 46 add, + 213
►Decimal, display result as decimal 46 amortisation table, amortTbl( ) 8, 17
►DMS, display as amortTbl( ), amortisation table 8, 17
degree/minute/second 55 and, Boolean operator 9
►exp, display in terms of e 64 angle( ), angle 10
►Grad, convert to gradian angle 87 angle, angle( ) 10
►Polar, display as polar vector 134 ANOVA, one-way variance analysis 10
►Rad, convert to radian angle 144 ANOVA2way, two-way variance
►Rect, display as rectangular vector 147 analysis 11
►sin, display in terms of sine 168 Ans, last answer 13
►Sphere, display as spherical vector 176 answer (last), Ans 13
append, & 224
⇒ approx( ), approximate 13, 15
approximate, approx( ) 13, 15
⇒ , logical implication 223, 257 approxRational( ) 14
arc length, arcLen( ) 15
→ arccos(), cos⁻¹() 14
arccosh(), cosh⁻¹() 14
→, store variable 237 arccot(), cot⁻¹() 14
arccoth(), coth⁻¹() 14
⇔ arccsc(), csc⁻¹() 15
⇔, logical double implication 223, 257 arccsch(), csch⁻¹() 15
arcLen( ), arc length 15
© arcsec(), sec⁻¹() 15
arcsech(), sech⁻¹() 15
©, comment 238 arcsin(), sin⁻¹() 15
arcsinh(), sinh⁻¹() 15
° arctan(), tan⁻¹() 15
arctanh(), tanh⁻¹() 16
°, degree notation 232 arguments in TVM functions 197
°, degrees/minutes/seconds 232 augment( ), augment/concatenate 16
augment/concatenate, augment( ) 16
0 average rate of change, avgRC( ) 16
avgRC( ), average rate of change 16
0b, binary indicator 238
0h, hexadecimal indicator 238

Index 277
 B zeros, cZeros( ) 43
conj( ), complex conjugate 28
binary constant
display, ►Base2 17 in solve( ) 173
indicator, 0b 238 constants
binomCdf( ) 20, 93 in cSolve( ) 40
binomPdf( ) 20 in cZeros( ) 44
Boolean operators in deSolve( ) 50
⇒ 223, 257 in solve( ) 175
⇔ 223 in zeros( ) 206
and 9 shortcuts for 257
nand 120 constraint operator "|" 236
nor 124 constraint operator, order of
not 126 evaluation 259
or 130 construct matrix, constructMat( ) 28
xor 203 constructMat( ), construct matrix 28
convert
C ►Grad 87
►Rad 144
Cdf( ) 70
units 234
ceiling( ), ceiling 21
copy variable or function, CopyVar 29
ceiling, ceiling( ) 21, 36
correlation matrix, corrMat( ) 29
centralDiff( ) 21
corrMat( ), correlation matrix 29
cFactor( ), complex factor 22
cos⁻¹, arccosine 31
char( ), character string 23
cos( ), cosine 30
character string, char( ) 23
cosh⁻¹( ), hyperbolic arccosine 33
characters
cosh( ), hyperbolic cosine 32
numeric code, ord( ) 132
cosine
string, char( ) 23
display expression in terms of 30
charPoly( ) 23
cosine, cos( ) 30
clear
cot⁻¹( ), arccotangent 34
error, ClrErr 25
cot( ), cotangent 33
Clear 243
cotangent, cot( ) 33
ClearAZ 25
coth⁻¹( ), hyperbolic arccotangent 34
ClrErr, clear error 25
coth( ), hyperbolic cotangent 34
colAugment 26
count days between dates, dbd( ) 45
colDim( ), matrix column dimension 26
count items in a list conditionally ,
colNorm( ), matrix column norm 26
countif( ) 35
combinations, nCr( ) 121
count items in a list, count( ) 35
comDenom( ), common
count( ), count items in a list 35
denominator 26
countif( ), conditionally count items
comment, © 238
in a list 35
common denominator, comDenom(
cPolyRoots() 36
) 26
cross product, crossP( ) 36
completeSquare( ), complete square 27
crossP( ), cross product 36
complex
csc⁻¹( ), inverse cosecant 37
conjugate, conj( ) 28
csc( ), cosecant 37
factor, cFactor( ) 22
csch⁻¹( ), inverse hyperbolic cosecant 38
solve, cSolve( ) 38
csch( ), hyperbolic cosecant 38

278 Index
cSolve( ), complex solve 38 deSolve( ), solution 50
cubic regression, CubicReg 41 det( ), matrix determinant 52
CubicReg, cubic regression 41 diag( ), matrix diagonal 52
cumulative sum, cumulativeSum( ) 42 dim( ), dimension 52
cumulativeSum( ), cumulative sum 42 dimension, dim( ) 52
cycle, Cycle 42 Disp, display data 53, 160
Cycle, cycle 42 DispAt 53
cylindrical vector display, ►Cylind 43 display as
cZeros( ), complex zeros 43 binary, ►Base2 17
cylindrical vector, ►Cylind 43
D decimal angle, ►DD 46
decimal integer, ►Base10 19
d( ), first derivative 224 degree/minute/second, ►DMS 55
days between dates, dbd( ) 45 hexadecimal, ►Base16 19
dbd( ), days between dates 45 polar vector, ►Polar 134
decimal rectangular vector, ►Rect 147
angle display, ►DD 46 spherical vector, ►Sphere 176
integer display, ►Base10 19 display data, Disp 53, 160
Define 46 distribution functions
Define LibPriv 47 binomCdf( ) 20, 93
Define LibPub 48 binomPdf( ) 20
define, Define 46 invNorm( ) 94
Define, define 46 invt( ) 94
defining Invχ²( ) 92
private function or programme 47 normCdf( ) 126
public function or programme 48 normPdf( ) 126
definite integral poissCdf( ) 133
template for 6 poissPdf( ) 134
degree notation, ° 232 tCdf( ) 187
degree/minute/second display, tPdf( ) 192
►DMS 55 χ²2way( ) 23
degree/minute/second notation 232 χ²Cdf( ) 24
delete χ²GOF( ) 24
void elements from list 49 χ²Pdf( ) 25
deleting divide, / 215
variable, DelVar 49 domain function, domain( ) 56
deltaList() 48 domain( ), domain function 56
deltaTmpCnv() 49 dominant term, dominantTerm( ) 56
DelVar, delete variable 49 dominantTerm( ), dominant term 56
delVoid( ), remove void elements 49 dot
denominator 26 addition, .+ 217
derivative or nth derivative division, ./ 218
template for 6 multiplication, .* 218
derivative() 49 power, .^ 218
derivatives product, dotP( ) 58
first derivative, d( ) 224 subtraction, .- 217
numeric derivative, nDeriv( ) 122-123 dotP( ), dot product 58
numeric derivative, nDerivative( draw 244-246
) 122

Index 279
 E expand( ), expand 66
expand, expand( ) 66
e exponent exponent, E 230
template for 2 exponential regession, ExpReg 67
e to a power, e^( ) 58, 65 exponents
e, display expression in terms of 64 template for 1
E, exponent 230 expr( ), string to expression 67, 108
e^( ), e to a power 58 ExpReg, exponential regession 67
eff( ), convert nominal to effective expressions
rate 59 expression to list, exp►list( ) 65
effective rate, eff( ) 59 string to expression, expr( ) 67, 108
eigenvalue, eigVl( ) 60
eigenvector, eigVc( ) 59 F
eigVc( ), eigenvector 59
eigVl( ), eigenvalue 60 factor( ), factor 68
else if, ElseIf 60 factor, factor( ) 68
else, Else 88 factorial, ! 224
ElseIf, else if 60 fill 247-248
empty (void) elements 255 Fill, matrix fill 70
end financial functions, tvmFV( ) 195
for, EndFor 73 financial functions, tvmI( ) 196
function, EndFunc 77 financial functions, tvmN( ) 196
if, EndIf 88 financial functions, tvmPmt( ) 196
loop, EndLoop 110 financial functions, tvmPV( ) 197
try, EndTry 193 first derivative
while, EndWhile 203 template for 5
end function, EndFunc 77 FiveNumSummary 71
end if, EndIf 88 floor( ), floor 71
end loop, EndLoop 110 floor, floor( ) 71
end while, EndWhile 203 fMax( ), function maximum 72
EndTry, end try 193 fMin( ), function minimum 73
EndWhile, end while 203 For 73
EOS (Equation Operating System) 259 for, For 73
equal, = 219 For, for 73
Equation Operating System (EOS) 259 format string, format( ) 74
error codes and messages 265, 273 format( ), format string 74
errors and troubleshooting fpart( ), function part 74
clear error, ClrErr 25 fractions
pass error, PassErr 133 propFrac 140
euler( ), Euler function 61 template for 1
evaluate polynomial, polyEval( ) 136 freqTable( ) 75
evaluation, order of 259 frequency( ) 76
exact( ), exact 64 Frobenius norm, norm( ) 125
exact, exact( ) 64 Func, function 77
exclusion with "|" operator 236 Func, programme function 77
exit, Exit 64 functions
Exit, exit 64 maximum, fMax( ) 72
exp( ), e to a power 65 minimum, fMin( ) 73
exp►list( ), expression to list 65 part, fpart( ) 74
programme function, Func 77

280 Index
 user-defined 46 tangent, tanh( ) 185
functions and variables
copying 29 I

G identity matrix, identity( ) 88

identity( ), identity matrix 88
g, gradians 230 if, If 88
gcd( ), greatest common divisor 78 If, if 88
geomCdf( ) 78 ifFn( ) 89
geomPdf( ) 78 imag( ), imaginary part 90
Get 79, 249 imaginary part, imag( ) 90
get/return ImpDif( ), implicit derivative 90
denominator, getDenom( ) 80 implicit derivative, Impdif( ) 90
number, getNum( ) 85 indefinite integral
variables injformation, template for 6
getVarInfo( ) 83, 86 indirection operator (#) 260
getDenom( ), get/return indirection, # 230
denominator 80 input, Input 90
getKey() 80 Input, input 90
getLangInfo( ), get/return language inString( ), within string 91
information 83 int( ), integer 91
getLockInfo( ), tests lock status of intDiv( ), integer divide 91
variable or variable group 84 integer divide, intDiv( ) 91
getMode( ), get mode settings 84 integer part, iPart( ) 94
getNum( ), get/return number 85 integer, int( ) 91
GetStr 85 integral, ∫ 225
getType( ), get type of variable 86 interpolate( ), interpolate 92
getVarInfo( ), get/return variables inverse cumulative normal
information 86 distribution (invNorm( ) 94
go to, Goto 87 inverse, ^⁻¹ 235
Goto, go to 87 invF( ) 92
gradian notation, g 230 invNorm( ), inverse cumulative
greater than or equal, ≥ 222 normal distribution) 94
greater than, > 222 invt( ) 94
greatest common divisor, gcd( ) 78 Invχ²( ) 92
groups, locking and unlocking 107, 200 iPart( ), integer part 94
groups, testing lock status 84 irr( ), internal rate of return
internal rate of return, irr( ) 94
H isPrime( ), prime test 95
isVoid( ), test for void 95
hexadecimal
display, ►Base16 19 L
indicator, 0h 238
hyperbolic label, Lbl 96
arccosine, cosh⁻¹( ) 33 language
arcsine, sinh⁻¹( ) 170 get language information 83
arctangent, tanh⁻¹( ) 186 Lbl, label 96
cosine, cosh( ) 32 lcm, least common multiple 96
sine, sinh( ) 170 least common multiple, lcm 96
left( ), left 96

Index 281
left, left( ) 96 Local, local variable 106
length of string 52 Lock, lock variable or variable group 107
less than or equal, ≤ 221 locking variables and variable groups 107
LibPriv 47 Log
LibPub 48 template for 2
library logarithmic regression, LnReg 105
create shortcuts to objects 97 logarithms 104
libShortcut( ), create shortcuts to logical double implication, ⇔ 223
library objects 97 logical implication, ⇒ 223, 257
limit logistic regression, Logistic 108
lim( ) 98 logistic regression, LogisticD 109
limit( ) 98 Logistic, logistic regression 108
template for 6 LogisticD, logistic regression 109
limit( ) or lim( ), limit 98 loop, Loop 110
linear regression, LinRegAx 99 Loop, loop 110
linear regression, LinRegBx 98, 100 LU, matrix lower-upper
LinRegBx, linear regression 98 decomposition 111
LinRegMx, linear regression 99
LinRegtIntervals, linear regression 100 M
LinRegtTest 102
linSolve() 103 mat►list( ), matrix to list 112
list to matrix, list►mat( ) 104 matrices
list, conditionally count items in 35 augment/concatenate, augment
list, count items in 35 () 16
list►mat( ), list to matrix 104 column dimension, colDim( ) 26
lists column norm, colNorm( ) 26
augment/concatenate, augment cumulative sum, cumulativeSum
() 16 () 42
cross product, crossP( ) 36 determinant, det( ) 52
cumulative sum, cumulativeSum diagonal, diag( ) 52
() 42 dimension, dim( ) 52
differences in a list, Δlist( ) 104 dot addition, .+ 217
dot product, dotP( ) 58 dot division, ./ 218
empty elements in 255 dot multiplication, .* 218
expression to list, exp►list( ) 65 dot power, .^ 218
list to matrix, list►mat( ) 104 dot subtraction, .- 217
matrix to list, mat►list( ) 112 eigenvalue, eigVl( ) 60
maximum, max( ) 112 eigenvector, eigVc( ) 59
mid-string, mid( ) 114 filling, Fill 70
minimum, min( ) 115 identity, identity( ) 88
new, newList( ) 122 list to matrix, list►mat( ) 104
product, product( ) 139 lower-upper decomposition, LU 111
sort ascending, SortA 176 matrix to list, mat►list( ) 112
sort descending, SortD 176 maximum, max( ) 112
summation, sum( ) 182 minimum, min( ) 115
ln( ), natural logarithm 104 new, newMat( ) 122
LnReg, logarithmic regression 105 product, product( ) 139
local variable, Local 106 QR factorization, QR 141
local, Local 106 random, randMat( ) 146

282 Index
 reduced row echelon form, rref( mRowAdd( ), matrix row
) 158 multiplication and addition 117
row addition, rowAdd( ) 157 Multiple linear regression t test 119
row dimension, rowDim( ) 157 multiply, * 214
row echelon form, ref( ) 148 MultReg 117
row multiplication and addition, MultRegIntervals( ) 118
mRowAdd( ) 117 MultRegTests( ) 119
row norm, rowNorm( ) 157
row operation, mRow( ) 117 N
row swap, rowSwap( ) 158
submatrix, subMat( ) 181, 183 nand, Boolean operator 120
summation, sum( ) 182 natural logarithm, ln( ) 104
transpose, T 183 nCr( ), combinations 121
matrix (1 × 2) nDerivative( ), numeric derivative 122
template for 4 negation, entering negative
matrix (2 × 1) numbers 260
template for 4 net present value, npv( ) 128
matrix (2 × 2) new
template for 4 list, newList( ) 122
matrix (m × n) matrix, newMat( ) 122
template for 4 newList( ), new list 122
matrix to list, mat►list( ) 112 newMat( ), new matrix 122
max( ), maximum 112 nfMax( ), numeric function
maximum, max( ) 112 maximum 122
mean( ), mean 112 nfMin( ), numeric function minimum 123
mean, mean( ) 112 nInt( ), numeric integral 123
median( ), median 113 nom ), convert effective to nominal
median, median( ) 113 rate 124
medium-medium line regression, nominal rate, nom( ) 124
MedMed 114 nor, Boolean operator 124
MedMed, medium-medium line norm( ), Frobenius norm 125
regression 114 normal distribution probability,
mid-string, mid( ) 114 normCdf( ) 126
mid( ), mid-string 114 normal line, normalLine( ) 126
min( ), minimum 115 normalLine( ) 126
minimum, min( ) 115 normCdf( ) 126
minute notation, ′ 232 normPdf( ) 126
mirr( ), modified internal rate of not equal, ≠ 220
return 116 not, Boolean operator 126
mixed fractions, using propFrac() nPr( ), permutations 127
with 140 npv( ), net present value 128
mod( ), modulo 116 nSolve( ), numeric solution 128
mode settings, getMode( ) 84 nth root
modes template for 2
setting, setMode( ) 163 numeric
modified internal rate of return, mirr derivative, nDeriv( ) 122-123
derivative, nDerivative( ) 122
() 116
integral, nInt( ) 123
modulo, mod( ) 116
solution, nSolve( ) 128
mRow( ), matrix row operation 117

Index 283
 O product( ), product 139
product, ∏( ) 227
objects template for 5
create shortcuts to library 97 product, product( ) 139
one-variable statistics, OneVar 129 programmes and programming
OneVar, one-variable statistics 129 display I/O screen, Disp 160
operators programming
order of evaluation 259 define programme, Prgm 139
or (Boolean), or 130 display data, Disp 53, 160
or, Boolean operator 130 pass error, PassErr 133
ord( ), numeric character code 132 programs
defining private library 47
P defining public library 48
programs and programming
P►Rx( ), rectangular x coordinate 132 clear error, ClrErr 25
P►Ry( ), rectangular y coordinate 132 display I/O screen, Disp 53
pass error, PassErr 133 end try, EndTry 193
PassErr, pass error 133 try, Try 193
Pdf( ) 75 proper fraction, propFrac 140
percent, % 219 propFrac, proper fraction 140
permutations, nPr( ) 127
piecewise function (2-piece) Q
template for 2
piecewise function (N-piece) QR factorization, QR 141
template for 3 QR, QR factorization 141
piecewise( ) 133 quadratic regression, QuadReg 141
poissCdf( ) 133 QuadReg, quadratic regression 141
poissPdf( ) 134 quartic regression, QuartReg 142
polar QuartReg, quartic regression 142
coordinate, R►Pr( ) 144
coordinate, R►Pθ( ) 143 R
vector display, ►Polar 134
polyCoef( ) 135 R, radian 231
polyDegree( ) 135 R►Pr( ), polar coordinate 144
polyEval( ), evaluate polynomial 136 R►Pθ( ), polar coordinate 143
polyGcd( ) 136-137 radian, R 231
polynomials rand( ), random number 145
evaluate, polyEval( ) 136 randBin, random number 145
random, randPoly( ) 146 randInt( ), random integer 145
PolyRoots() 137 randMat( ), random matrix 146
power of ten, 10^( ) 235 randNorm( ), random norm 146
power regression, random
PowerReg 137-138, 150, 152, 188 matrix, randMat( ) 146
power, ^ 216 norm, randNorm( ) 146
PowerReg, power regression 138 number seed, RandSeed 147
Prgm, define programme 139 polynomial, randPoly( ) 146
prime number test, isPrime( ) 95 random sample 146
prime, ′ 233 randPoly( ), random polynomial 146
probability densiy, normPdf( ) 126 randSamp( ) 146
prodSeq() 139 RandSeed, random number seed 147

284 Index
real( ), real 147 rowNorm( ), matrix row norm 157
real, real( ) 147 rowSwap( ), matrix row swap 158
reciprocal, ^⁻¹ 235 rref( ), reduced row echelon form 158
rectangular-vector display, ►Rect 147
rectangular x coordinate, P►Rx( ) 132 S
rectangular y coordinate, P►Ry( ) 132
reduced row echelon form, rref( ) 158 sec⁻¹( ), inverse secant 159
ref( ), row echelon form 148 sec( ), secant 158
RefreshProbeVars 149 sech⁻¹( ), inverse hyperbolic secant 159
regressions sech( ), hyperbolic secant 159
cubic, CubicReg 41 second derivative
exponential, ExpReg 67 template for 6
linear regression, LinRegAx 99 second notation, " 232
linear regression, LinRegBx 98, 100 seq( ), sequence 160
logarithmic, LnReg 105 seqGen( ) 161
Logistic 108 seqn( ) 161
logistic, Logistic 109 sequence, seq( ) 160-161
medium-medium line, MedMed 114 series( ), series 162
MultReg 117 series, series( ) 162
power regression, set
PowerRe mode, setMode( ) 163
setMode( ), set mode 163
g 137-138, 150, 152, 188
settings, get current 84
quadratic, QuadReg 141
shift( ), shift 165
quartic, QuartReg 142
shift, shift( ) 165
sinusoidal, SinReg 171
sign( ), sign 166
remain( ), remainder 150
sign, sign( ) 166
remainder, remain( ) 150
simult( ), simultaneous equations 167
remove
simultaneous equations, simult( ) 167
void elements from list 49
sin⁻¹( ), arcsine 169
Request 150
sin( ), sine 168
RequestStr 152
sine
result
display expression in terms of 168
display in terms of cosine 30
sine, sin( ) 168
display in terms of e 64
sinh⁻¹( ), hyperbolic arcsine 170
display in terms of sine 168
sinh( ), hyperbolic sine 170
result values, statistics 179
SinReg, sinusoidal regression 171
results, statistics 178
sinusoidal regression, SinReg 171
return, Return 153
solution, deSolve( ) 50
Return, return 153
solve( ), solve 172
right( ), right 153
solve, solve( ) 172
right, right( ) 27, 61, 92, 153-154, 202
SortA, sort ascending 176
rk23( ), Runge Kutta function 154
SortD, sort descending 176
rotate( ), rotate 155
sorting
rotate, rotate( ) 155
ascending, SortA 176
round( ), round 156
descending, SortD 176
round, round( ) 156
spherical vector display, ►Sphere 176
row echelon form, ref( ) 148
sqrt( ), square root 177
rowAdd( ), matrix row addition 157
square root
rowDim( ), matrix row dimension 157
template for 1

Index 285
square root, √( ) 177, 226 subMat( ), submatrix 181, 183
standard deviation, stdDev( ) 179-180, 200 submatrix, subMat( ) 181, 183
stat.results 178 substitution with "|" operator 236
stat.values 179 subtract, - 213
statistics sum of interest payments 228
combinations, nCr( ) 121 sum of principal payments 229
factorial, ! 224 sum( ), summation 182
mean, mean( ) 112 sum, ∑( ) 228
median, median( ) 113 template for 5
one-variable statistics, OneVar 129 sumIf( ) 182
permutations, nPr( ) 127 summation, sum( ) 182
random norm, randNorm( ) 146 sumSeq() 183
random number seed, system of equations (2-equation)
RandSeed 147 template for 3
standard deviation, stdDev( system of equations (N-equation)
) 179-180, 200 template for 3
two-variable results, TwoVar 197
variance, variance( ) 200 T
stdDevPop( ), population standard
t test, tTest 194
deviation 179
T, transpose 183
stdDevSamp( ), sample standard
tan⁻¹( ), arctangent 184
deviation 180 tan( ), tangent 184
Stop command 181 tangent line, tangentLine( ) 185
store variable (→) 237 tangent, tan( ) 184
storing tangentLine( ) 185
symbol, & 238 tanh⁻¹( ), hyperbolic arctangent 186
string tanh( ), hyperbolic tangent 185
dimension, dim( ) 52 Taylor polynomial, taylor( ) 187
length 52 taylor( ), Taylor polynomial 187
string( ), expression to string 181 tCdf( ), studentt distribution
strings
probability 187
append, & 224
tCollect( ), trigonometric collection 187
character code, ord( ) 132
templates
character string, char( ) 23
absolute value 3-4
expression to string, string( ) 181
definite integral 6
format, format( ) 74
derivative or nth derivative 6
formatting 74
e exponent 2
indirection, # 230
exponent 1
left, left( ) 96
first derivative 5
mid-string, mid( ) 114
fraction 1
right, right( ) 27, 61, 92, 153-154, 202
indefinite integral 6
rotate, rotate( ) 155
limit 6
shift, shift( ) 165
Log 2
string to expression, expr( ) 67, 108
matrix (1 × 2) 4
using to create variable names 260
matrix (2 × 1) 4
within, InString 91
matrix (2 × 2) 4
student-t distribution probability,
matrix (m × n) 4
tCdf( ) 187 nth root 2
student-t probability density, tPdf( ) 192

286 Index
 piecewise function (2-piece) 2 unLock, unlock variable or variable
piecewise function (N-piece) 3 group 200
product, ∏( ) 5 unlocking variables and variable
second derivative 6 groups 200
square root 1 user-defined functions 46
sum, ∑( ) 5 user-defined functions and
system of equations (2- programs 47-48
equation) 3
system of equations (N- V
equation) 3
test for void, isVoid( ) 95 variable
Test_2S, 2-sample F test 76 creating name from a character
tExpand( ), trigonometric expansion 188 string 260
Text command 188 variable and functions
time value of money, Future Value 195 copying 29
time value of money, Interest 196 variables
time value of money, number of clear all single-letter 25
payments 196 delete, DelVar 49
time value of money, payment local, Local 106
amount 196 variables, locking and unlocking 84, 107, 200
time value of money, present value 197 variance, variance( ) 200
tInterval, t confidence interval 189 varPop( ) 200
tInterval_2Samp, twosample t varSamp( ), sample variance 200
confidence interval 190 vectors
tmpCnv() 191 cross product, crossP( ) 36
tPdf( ), studentt probability density 192 cylindrical vector display,
trace( ) 192 ►Cylind 43
transpose, T 183 dot product, dotP( ) 58
trigonometric collection, tCollect( ) 187 unit, unitV( ) 199
trigonometric expansion, tExpand( ) 188 void elements 255
Try, error handling command 193 void elements, remove 49
tTest, t test 194 void, test for 95
tTest_2Samp, two-sample t test 195
TVM arguments 197 W
tvmFV( ) 195 Wait command 201
tvmI( ) 196 warnCodes( ), Warning codes 202
tvmN( ) 196 warning codes and messages 273
tvmPmt( ) 196 when( ), when 202
tvmPV( ) 197 when, when( ) 202
two-variable results, TwoVar 197 while, While 203
TwoVar, two-variable results 197 While, while 203
with, | 236
U
within string, inString( ) 91
underscore, _ 233
unit vector, unitV( ) 199 X
units x², square 217
convert 234 XNOR 223
unitV( ), unit vector 199 xor, Boolean exclusive or 203

Index 287
 Z
zeroes( ), zeroes 204
zeroes, zeroes( ) 204
zInterval, z confidence interval 207
zInterval_1Prop, one-proportion z
confidence interval 207
zInterval_2Prop, two-proportion z
confidence interval 208
zInterval_2Samp, two-sample z
confidence interval 208
zTest 209
zTest_1Prop, one-proportion z test 210
zTest_2Prop, two-proportion z test 210
zTest_2Samp, two-sample z test 211

Δ
Δlist( ), list difference 104
ΔtmpCnv() 191

Χ
χ²2way 23
χ²Cdf( ) 24
χ²GOF 24
χ²Pdf( ) 25

288 Index